0% found this document useful (0 votes)
82 views191 pages

100AFE

This document is a design submittal from Pumps by Design Inc. for a packaged pump station to be installed at the Starlite-Chico Ave. system in the City of South El Monte. The submittal includes pump details, control panel specifications and schematics, wet well and cover details, and valves and fittings. It requests approval and notice to proceed with the specified products and services. Important confidentiality terms are also noted.

Uploaded by

chris p
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
Download as pdf or txt
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
82 views191 pages

100AFE

This document is a design submittal from Pumps by Design Inc. for a packaged pump station to be installed at the Starlite-Chico Ave. system in the City of South El Monte. The submittal includes pump details, control panel specifications and schematics, wet well and cover details, and valves and fittings. It requests approval and notice to proceed with the specified products and services. Important confidentiality terms are also noted.

Uploaded by

chris p
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 191

DATE CREATED: 07/17/2023

REVISION #: REV.1

PACKAGED PUMP STATION


DESIGN SUBMITTAL
FOR:

STARLITE-CHICO AVE. SYSTEM


CITY OF SOUTH EL MONTE

STORM WATER LIFT STATION:


9 GPM @ 17 FT TDH

Submittal for approval by:


_________________________

Submittal prepared by:


_________________________

PUMPS BY DESIGN INC.


2045 SOUTH BAKER AVE.
ONTARIO, CA 91761

Phone: (909) 637-9945


Email: [email protected]
DESIGN SUBMITTAL

07/17/2023
DATE:
REV.1
REVISION #:

STARLITE-CHICO AVE. SYSTEM


CITY OF SOUTH EL MONTE

By signing the Submittal Approval and Notice to Proceed Form below, I approve the products and services as specified
in the PUMPS BY DESIGN INC. Design Submittal. I understand that any change(s) requested after signing and
returning this form will result in a change order and cause delays for the system delivery.
I hereby formally release,PUMPS BY DESIGN INC., to begin producing the products approved in this Design Submittal
and to deliver the products to the project site or designated delivery location.
Note: that PUMPS BY DESIGN INC. cannot confirm actual delivery dates until after the goods are released into
production.

Please initial in the approved boxes for each submittal section and sign below.

REQUESTED DELIVERY DATE:

PRINT CUSTOMER NAME AND COMPANY:

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE:

2045 South Baker Ave. | Ontario, CA 91761


Phone: (909) 673-9945
[email protected]
Important Confidentiality Notice
This document is disclosed only to the recipient to whom this document is addressed and is
pursuant to a relationship of confidentiality under which the recipient has obligations to
confidentiality. This document constitutes confidential information and contains proprietary
information belonging to Pumps by Design Inc. The confidential information is to be used by
the recipient only for the purpose for which this document is supplied. The recipient must
obtain Pumps by Design Inc’s written consent before the recipient or any other person acting
on its behalf, communicate any information on the contents or the subject matter of this
document or part thereof to any third party. The third party to whom the communication is
made includes individual, firm or company or an employee or employees of such a firm and
company.
The recipient, by its receipt of this document, acknowledges that this document is confidential
information and contains proprietary information belonging to Pumps by Design Inc and
further acknowledges its obligation to comply with the provisions of this notice.
The contents of this document are provided in commercial confidence, solely for the purpose
of evaluating whether the contract should be awarded to Pumps by Design Inc
The information contained in this document represents the views and opinions of Pumps by
Design Inc on the issues discussed, as of the date of publication. Due to the dynamic nature of
the industry and the technology that it depends upon, Pumps by Design Inc makes no
warranty as to the long term accuracy of the assessments made herein.
.

PUMPS BY DESIGN INC - Confidential


Table of Submittal’s Details
• Shop Drawing, Calculations
• Pump Details
• Controls Panel Specifications and
Schematics
• Wet Well and Cover
• Valves and Fittings
• Tank Accessories and supports

PUMPS BY DESIGN INC - Confidential


PUMP DETAILS

ShinMaywa Submersible Pumps NORUS CR Series

MODEL DESIGNATION
◆Motor model

50 CR 2 . 15S-1

Pole Voltage
Discharge Size 1-115V
2-2 inch

Rated Output Phase


(kW) .15-1/5HP, .25-1/ S-Single Phase
Pump Model 3HP .4-1/2HP, .75-1HP
CR
ShinMaywa Submersible Pumps NORUS CR Series

SPECIFICATIONS

Model:50CR
STANDARD OPTIONAL
Discharge Size 2 inch
Solid Size 1 1/4 inch (35mm)
Range of HP 1/5, 1/3, 1/2, 1 HP
Range of Performance Capacity Up to 115(Usgpm)
Total Head 2 to 48(ft)
Limitation
Type of Liquid Handled Sewage, Waste water
Minimum Water Temperature 32 oF(0℃)
Maximum Water Temperature 104 oF(40℃)

Motor Insulation Class E, Single Phase


Voltage / Hz 115V 60Hz
Synchronous Speed 3600 RPM

Impeller Type Vortex Impeller

Material
Pump Housing Poly Amide Fiber Reinforced Resin
Impeller Poly Amide Fiber Reinforced Resin
Shaft 420J2 Stainless Steel
Motor Frame 304 Stainless Steel
Fastener 304 Stainless Steel

Mechanical Seal Materials Double Mechanical seal


Upper Side Ceramic / Carbon
Lower Side Silicon Carbide / Silicon Carbide

Bearing
Upper Side Single Deep Groove Ball Bearing (AC Bearing)
Lower Side Single Deep Groove Ball Bearing

Motor Protection Built-in Micro Thermal Protector

Accessory Submersible Cable Type STW Longer Cable


1/5HP: 20ft, 1/3-1HP: 32ft Guide Rail
ShinMaywa Submersible Pumps NORUS CR Series

SPECIFICATIONS (OPERATING CONDITION)

・Applied Water quality

Temperature 0-104 oF, 0-40℃


pH 6-9
Electric Conductivity 100mS/m or less
DO (Dissolved Oxygen) 1 – 4 mg (O2)/ℓ
Chlorine Iron 1,000 mg/ℓ or less
SS 3,000 mg/ℓ or less
BOD, COD 1,000 mg/ℓ or less
ShinMaywa Submersible Pumps NORUS CR Series

Performance Curve (Family Curve)

50

45

40

35

30
Total Head (ft)

25

20


15

10

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Capacity (Usgpm)
① 50CR2.15 ②50CR2.25 ③50CR2.4 ④50CR2.75
MODEL 122
Single Phase Duplex Control Panel

6
8 7
1

Model 122 NEMA 4X Model Shown

The newly redesigned Model 122 control panel controls two


120/208/240V single phase pumps in water and sewage COMPONENTS
installations. This panel includes a new innovative duplex
1. Newly designed larger NEMA 4X enclosure for
controller for pump control, alternation and alarm; including indoor/outdoor use
float status LEDs, control/alarm power on/off switch with LED a. Drip shield
indicator, pump run LEDs, HOA switches, pump lead lag selector b. (2) heavy duty wide clamping securable
switch, auxiliary contacts and more! latches
c. Stainless steel 1/4 turn cover set screw
The Model 122 control panel features built in lag pump delay time, d. Low profile hinged padlockable cover
pump failure detection, and float out of sequence. In addition,
e. Integral mounting flanges
there are four user selectable field programmable operations:
2. Duplex Controller
alarm steady state or flashing; alarm auto reset or manual reset;
a. Pump HOA switches with green/red LED
pump failure notification; and optional seal failure alarm beacon indicators
notification or beacon plus horn activation. b. Control Power ON/OFF switch
c. Power ON green LED indicator
Available in the new NEMA 4X enclosure designed for easy
d. Float status red LED indicators
installation and provides additional protection from the elements.
e. Float push-to-test buttons
Note: Options may increase enclosure size and/or change
f. Pump selector switch
enclosure features/component layout.
g. Auxiliary alarm contacts
PART NO. DESCRIPTION h. Terminal blocks for incoming power and
float switches
• 1019842* 1221W114H6A10E17G19B (NEMA 4X) j. Option: adjustable seal failure circuits
and red LED indicators
See catalog page for additional 122 panel configurations. 3. Magnetic Motor Contactors control pumps by
*Quick ship product switching electrical lines.
4. Circuit Breakers (optional) provides pump
disconnect and branch circuit protection
5. Ground Lugs
Red LED Alarm Beacon
7. Alarm Horn (not visible)
8. Exterior Alarm Test/Normal/Silence Switch
(not visible)

9500411A Rev 02/19


© 2018 SJE, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
SJE Rhombus is a trademark of SJE, Inc.

www.sjerhombus.com Toll Free 888-342-5753 Phone 218-847-1317


Model 122

Single Phase Duplex

Installation and Operation Manual

Parts Included

SJE RHOMBUS ® Model 122

Single Phase Duplex


Installation and Operation Manual

x3
or
x4
Control panel may
ordered with or
be
x3
or
without these items.

This control panel must be installed and serviced


by a licensed electrician
in accordance with the National Electric Code
NFPA-70, state and local electrical codes.
UL Type 4X enclosures are for indoor or outdoor
use.

Technical support,
service questions:

x4
1-800-Rhombus
(1-800-746-6287)
SJE Rhomus offers a five-year limited warranty.
Monday - Friday For complete terms and conditions, please visit
www.sjerhombus.com.
7:00 AM to 6:00 PM CST

Control panel may be


ordered with or
without these items.

This control panel must be installed and serviced by a licensed electrician in


accordance with the National Electric Code NFPA-70, state and local electrical codes.
UL Type 4X enclosures are for indoor or outdoor use.

Warranty void if panel is modified.

SJE Rhombus offers a five-year limited warranty.

?
For information regarding operation,
For complete terms and conditions, please visit www.sjerhombus.com.
available options, or servicing
questions, please call SJE Rhombus Products returned must be cleaned, sanitized, or decontaminated as necessary
Technical Support. prior to shipment to ensure that employees will not be exposed to health
hazards in handling said material. All applicable laws and regulations shall apply.

Manufactured by: SJE Rhombus Technical Support:


+1-800-746-6287 PN 1062629B 06/20
©2019 SJE, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
[email protected]
SJE RHOMBUS is a trademark of SJE, Inc
www.sjerhombus.com
Technical Support Hours: Monday-Friday, 7:00 AM to 6:00 PM Central Time
1
Installing the Float Switches Mounting the Control Panel
The Model 122 Single Phase Duplex control panel operates with NOTE
3 or 4 float switches to activate pump STOP, LEAD pump START,
If the distance to the control panel exceeds the length of
LAG pump START and high-level ALARM functions.
the float switch cords or the pump power cord, splicing
1 2 Label each float and cord end in a liquid-tight junction box will be required. For outdoor
Ensure all power is turned OFF with the provided pairs of or wet installation, we recommend an SJE Rhombus UL
before installing floats in tank. STOP, LEAD, LAG, and ALARM Type 4X junction box.
Failure to do so could result in stickers.
serious or fatal shock.

STOP

LEAD
LEAD

STOP

3 CAUTION!
If the floats are not properly mounted and connected in the correct
order, the pumps will not function properly.

Floats require free range of motion.


They must not touch each other or any equipment in the pump chamber.

Pipe Clamp Mounting Pipe Clamp Mounting


3 Float Operation 4 Float Operation

Lag Lag Lag

Lag/Alarm Alarm
Lag/Alarm Lag/Alarm Alarm Alarm

Lead Lead
Lead Lead
Lead Lead
Operating Operating
range Stop Stop range Stop Stop
Stop Stop

Tighten Make sure hose clamp


the band does not interfere
clamp. with float operation.

3.5”
(9cm)

Hose clamp is 18-8 Do not install cord under


stainless steel. hose clamp.

2
Wiring the Control Panel Operation
SJE Rhombus Model 122 Single Phase Duplex control panel
1 Determine conduit entrance locations on control panel as shown. operates with float switches. When all floats are in the
Check local codes and schematic inside the panel for the number
open or OFF position, the panel is inactive. As the liquid
of power circuits required.
level rises and closes the STOP float, the panel remains
CAUTION! inactive until the LEAD float closes. At this point the LEAD
pump will turn ON (if the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the
Be sure the pump power voltage and phase are the same as the
AUTO mode and the power is ON). The pump will remain
pump motor being installed.
ON until both the STOP and LEAD floats return to their OFF
positions. If the liquid level rises beyond both the STOP
2 Connect the following wires to the proper terminal positions: and LEAD floats to reach the LAG float, the lag pump will
• incoming power turn ON (if the Hand-Off-Auto switch is in the AUTO mode
• pump 1 and the power is ON). Both pumps will remain ON until the
• pump 2 STOP, LEAD, and LAG floats return to their OFF positions.
• float switches If the liquid level rises to reach the ALARM float, the alarm
See schematic inside control panel for details. will be activated.

Alarm System (Indicator Light and Horn)


When an alarm condition occurs, the red light and horn will
be activated.

If the TEST/NORMAL/SILENCE switch is moved to the


SILENCE position and released, the horn will be silenced.
When the alarm condition is cleared, the alarm system is
reset.

Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) Switches


The HOA 3-way switches control pump functions.

In HAND mode, the pump will turn ON.

OFF turns the pump OFF.

In AUTO mode, commands from the float switches


turn each pump ON and OFF.

Auxiliary Contact
Form C - Can be wired normally open or normally closed.

Circuit Breakers (optional)


Circuit Breakers provide pump disconnect and branch
circuit protection.

Motor Contactors
Motor contactors control pumps by switching electrical lines.

Typical Layout (May vary with options ordered).

CAUTION! You must use conduit sealant to prevent


moisture or gases from entering the panel.

Type 4X conduit must be used to maintain a Type 4X rating of


the control panel.
? Technical support,
service questions:
+1-800-746-6287
[email protected]
3 Verify correct operation of control panel after installation is Monday - Friday
complete.
7:00 AM to 6:00 PM Central Time

3
HAND HAND SF1
H 100K
H 50K 125K

f i
OO 1-2 ALT 2-1 25K 150K
100K
SF2SF1
OFF H 50K 125K
HHH H
PUMP PUMP 15K
TM
TM

NC
A
OA 1-2
1-2 ALT
ALT 2-1
5K
25K 150K k
OO 1 2 O 2-1 SEAL FAIL SF2
O
AUTO
TM

PUMP
PUMP1 AUTO
1
LEAD j 15K
LEAD/ /LAG NC
TM

® LAG 5K
TM

A
TM

22650 County Highway 6 AAA A SELECTOR


SELECTOR SEAL FAIL
Detroit Lakes, MN 56501 USA PUMP
PUMP 11 PUMP 2
PUMP
PUMP11 PUMP 2
Tel: 218-847-1317
Email: [email protected] d
Web: www.sjerhombus.com
g
STOP STOP
LEAD LAG ALARM
e TEST
STOPTEST
STOP TEST LEAD TEST LAG
LAG ALARM
ALARM
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST TEST
TEST TEST
TEST TEST
TEST

OFF ON ON OFF
POWER L1 Nc 3
3
4 3 5 4 6 5
4 877 AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
ON OFF L1
L12N
L1
L1
L1 N
N
N
N 333 44
766 898 910
9 10
10 CONTACTS
10 CONTACTS
CONTACTS
ONONOFF
ON
OFF
1OFF
ON
OFF2 1POWER NONO
C C
NC
NO CCNC
NC
1111 22222 NO NC
DUPLEX
DUPLEX
l
CONTROLLER
DUPLEX
DUPLEX a
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
1054970
DUPLEX
CONTROLLER
1054970 b TB1
TB1
TB1 TB2100K
1054970
CONTROLLER
1054970 TB1 SF1
h
1054970

Model shown contains optional Seal Fail circuitry.

COMPONENTS
a. ON/OFF Switch - Control/Alarm Power g. Simulate Float Buttons x4
b. 120V Incoming Power Terminals h. Float Terminals x8
c. Power LED - (Green) i. Lead/Lag Selecter Switch
d. Pump HOA Switches j. Dual Seal Fail Pot - (Optional)
e. Float LEDs - (Red) x4 k. Dual Seal Fail LEDs - (Red) - (Optional)
f. Pump LEDs l. Auxiliary Alarm Terminals
Pump Run - (Green)
Pump Fail - (Red)

PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS
WITH POWER ON, HOAs OFF, FLOATS OFF OR DISCONNECTED, PRESS DESIRED FLOAT BUTTON RAPIDLY 4 TIMES AND HOLD
**PUMP LEDs WILL FLASH UPON SUCCESSFUL PROGRAMMING**
OPTIONS FLOAT BUTTON DEFAULT OPERATION
PUMP FAIL ALARM STOP ON ACTIVATES IF A PUMP CAUSES “LAG” 3 CYCLES IN A ROW
MANUAL ALARM RESET LEAD OFF LATCHES HIGH ALARM: CLEAR WITH EXTERNAL TEST SWITCH
SEAL FAIL HORN LAG OFF ACTIVATES HORN UPON SEAL FAIL
ALARM FLASHER ALARM OFF FLASHES BEACON UPON HIGH ALARM

ALARM CONDITIONS
ALARM BEACON CONTROLLER LED HORN
PUMP FAIL FLASHING RED PUMP LIGHT NO
SEAL FAIL FLASHING SF1, SF2 PROG
FLOAT FAIL FLASHING BAD FLOAT NOT LIT NO
HIGH ALARM SOLID ALARM FLOAT YES

Technical Support: +1-800-746-6287


[email protected]
www.sjerhombus.com
4 Technical Support Hours: Monday - Friday, 7 A.M. to 6 P.M Central Time
1038253H 12/19
SJE MilliAmpMaster™ Control Switches, SJE MicroMaster® AC/DC Pump Switch,
and SJE MicroMaster® Plus WS Pump Switch Installation Instructions
These mechanically-activated switches provide automatic control for AC and DC applications in water and sewage applications.

SJE MILLIAMPMASTER™ (narrow-angle version) SJE MILLIAMPMASTER™ (wide-angle version)


Mechanically-activated control switch for: Mechanically-activated control switch for:
• Low current, non-arcing applications • Low current, non-arcing applications
down to 0.160 mA at 125 VAC down to 0.160 mA at 125 VAC
• Water • Water
• Sewage application • Sewage application
• Control differential of 1.5 inches above
or below horizontal with 3.5 inch tether

tether
length 3.5 6 9 12 15 18 22
(inches) min max
pumping
range 8 11 15 21 28 31 36
(inches)

SJE MICROMASTER® AC/DC SJE MICROMASTER® PLUS WS


Mechanically-activated pump and control Mechanically-activated pump switch for:
switch for:
• Water
• Battery backup pumps
• Sewage applications
• Arcing loads
• Water
• Sewage applications

tether tether
length 3.5 6 9 12 15 18 22 length 3.5 6 9 12 15 18 22
(inches) min max (inches) min max
pumping pumping
range 8 11 15 21 28 31 36 range 8 11 15 21 28 31 36
(inches) (inches)

PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
• Periodically inspect the product. Check that the cable has not become worn or that the housing has not been damaged so as to impair the protection of the
product. Replace the product immediately if any damage is found or suspected.
• Periodically check to see that the float is free to move and operate the switch.
• Use only SJE Rhombus® replacement parts.

SJE RHOMBUS® FIVE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY


Five-Year Limited Warranty. For complete terms and conditions, please visit www.sjerhombus.com.

NOTICE!
Products returned must be cleaned, sanitized, or decontaminated as necessary prior to shipment to ensure that employees
will not be exposed to health hazards in handling said material. All applicable laws and regulations shall apply.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EXPLOSION OR FIRE HAZARD
Disconnect power before installing or servicing this Do not use with flammable liquids.
product. A qualified service person must install and Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70.
service this product according to applicable electrical Suitable for usage with intrinsically safe circuit
and plumbing codes. extensions as defined by UL 698A.
Failure to follow these precautions could result in serious injury or death. Replace product immediately if switch cable becomes damaged
or severed. Keep these instructions with warranty after installation. This product must be installed in accordance with National Electric Code,
ANSI/NFPA 70 so as to prevent moisture from entering or accumulating within boxes, conduit bodies, fittings, float housing, or cable.

For detailed specifications on this product, or for the complete line of SJE Rhombus®
panel, alarm, and switch products, visit our website at www.sjerhombus.com.

MOUNTING THE SWITCH


1. Determine the required cord Figure B
tether length according to product DC Wiring Diagram
specifications on the front page Battery Backup Installation Normally Open and Normally Closed
and as shown in Figure A, B & C.
2. Place the cord into the clamp as
shown as shown in Figure D.
3. Locate clamp at desired activation
level and secure the clamp to the
discharge pipe as shown in
Figure D.
Note: Do not install cord under
hose clamp.
4. Tighten the hose clamp using Ensure cable connections are performed in
screwdriver. Over tightening may a dry junction box or other watertight seal
that seals both conductors and cable jacket.
result in damage to the plastic Failure to do so could result in electrical shock
clamp. Make sure the float cable hazard and/or water traveling down cable
is not allowed to touch the excess and entering the switch. Failure to guard
against this may affect switch performance.
hose clamp band during operation.
5. Wire switch as shown in the wiring
diagrams.
AC Wiring Diagram
6. Check installation. Allow system to
cycle to insure proper operation.
Figure C Normally Open and Normally Closed
SJE MilliAmpMaster™
(narrow angle version)
Note: All hose clamp components
are made of 18-8 stainless steel
material. See your SJE Rhombus®
supplier for replacements.
Figure A

tether In 230 VAC installations, one side of the line


length
Figure D going to the load is always HOT. This condition
exists if the switch is on or off. Install double
pole disconnect on all 230 VAC circuits.

pumping
Ensure cable connections are performed in a dry junction box
range
or other watertight seal that seals both conductors and cable
jacket. Failure to do so could result in electrical shock hazard
and/or water traveling down cable and entering the switch.
Failure to guard against this may affect switch performance.

Due to weight of cable, pumping range above horizontal is WARNING: Tethering switches below minimum
NOT equal to pumping range below horizontal. Use values
published on front page as a guide. Pumping ranges are ! tether length can affect switch operation and will
reduce the fatigue life of the cable.
based on testing in non-turbulent conditions. Range may
vary due to water temperature and cord shape. Note: As
the tether length increases, so does the variance of the
pumping range.

Technical Support: +1 800-746-6287


[email protected]
PN 1038253H 12/19
www.sjerhombus.com © 2019 SJE, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Technical Support Hours: Monday - Friday, 7 A.M. to 6 P.M. Central Time SJE RHOMBUS is a trademark of SJE, Inc.
Accessories Installation Instructions
Cord Seal, Cable Weight, Cable Clamp Assembly, and Float Bracket.

CORD SEALS CABLE WEIGHT


Provides an accurate pivot point for
Provides strain relief and a liquid-tight seal. suspended float switches.
 Seals 1-4 cables in 2" terminal  Gripper teeth on clip and weight
adapters channel securely lock float cable
 Seals 1-6 cables in 2½" terminal U.S. Patent 5,306,885 into place
adapters  Cable Weight can be adjusted
 PVC plugs included (for unused without the use of tools
cable positions)
 Ground wire

CABLE CLAMP ASSEMBLY FLOAT BRACKET


Provides cable anchor point and strain
relief. Secures cable in vertical direction. Provides convenient installation of
   For use with 18/16 gauge, float switches.
14 gauge, & 12 gauge cable
   Mounting clamp: ABS Nylon blend
   Hose clamp: highly corrosion  Six Float Bracket supports 1-6 floats
resistant stainless steel  Four Float Bracket supports 1-4 floats
 Can be directly mounted to wall or used with wall
mounting device
 Provides convenient location to stow excess float cord
 Supplied with cord strain relief connectors

PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
• Periodically inspect the product. Check that the cable has not become worn or that the housing has not been damaged so as to impair the protection of the
product. Replace the product immediately if any damage is found or suspected.
• Periodically check to see that the float is free to move and operate the pump or alarm.
• Use only SJE-Rhombus® replacement parts.

SJE-RHOMBUS® THREE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY


SJE-RHOMBUS® warrants to the original consumer that this product Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty
shall be free of manufacturing defects for three years after the date of lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Some states do not
consumer purchase. During that time period and subject to the conditions allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages,
set forth below, SJE-RHOMBUS® will repair or replace, for the original so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty
consumer, any component which proves to be defective due to defective gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which
materials or workmanship of SJE-RHOMBUS®. vary from state to state.

ELECTRICAL WIRING AND SERVICING OF THIS PRODUCT MUST TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE: The consumer shall assume all
BE PERFORMED BY A LICENSED ELECTRICIAN. responsibility and expense for removal, reinstallation, and freight. Any
item to be repaired or replaced under this warranty must be returned to
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY: (A) to damage due to lightning SJE-RHOMBUS®, or such place as designated by SJE-RHOMBUS®.
or conditions beyond the control of SJE-RHOMBUS®; (B) to defects or
malfunctions resulting from failure to properly install, operate or maintain ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
the unit in accordance with printed instructions provided; (C) to failures ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY.
resulting from abuse, misuse, accident, or negligence; (D) to units which SJE-RHOMBUS® SHALL NOT, IN ANY MANNER, BE LIABLE FOR
are not installed in accordance with applicable local codes, ordinances, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AS A RESULT
or accepted trade practices, and (E) to units repaired and/or modified OF A BREACH OF THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED
without prior authorization from SJE-RHOMBUS®. WARRANTY.

22650 County Highway 6  P.O. Box 1708  Detroit Lakes, Minnesota 56502 USA
1-888-DIAL-SJE (1-888-342-5753)  Phone: 218-847-1317  Fax: 218-847-4617  E-mail: [email protected]
Electrical Warnings

1062716A 07/19
Advertencias eléctricas SJE MILLIAMPMASTER™ WPS
Avertissements électriques
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Control Float Switch
Disconnect power before installing or servicing this product. A qualified
service person must install and service this product according to applicable Installation Instructions
electrical and plumbing codes. Instrucciones de instalación / Instructions d’installation
EXPLOSION OR FIRE HAZARD
Do not use with flammable liquids. Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA
70.
Suitable for usage with intrinsically safe circuit extensions as defined by
UL 698A.
Failure to follow these precautions could result in serious injury or death. Replace product Approved for use in tanks of
immediately if switch, cable weight, or cable becomes damaged or cracked. Keep these 250 US Gallons (950 L)
in volume or greater per float.
instructions with warranty after installation. This product must be installed in accordance
Agua potable - NSF/ANSI 61
with National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70 so as to prevent moisture from entering or Aprobado para uso en tanques de
accumulating within boxes, conduit bodies, fittings, float housing, or cable. 950 l (250 galones US)
en volumen o más por flotador.
Eau potable - NSF/ANSI 61
PRECAUCION RIESGO DE CHOQUE ELÉCTRICO Approuvé pour utilisation dans les réservoirs de
950 l (250 gallons US)
Desconecte el cable de alimentación antes de instalar o de hacerle
en volume ou plus par flotteur.
mantenimiento a este producto. La instalación y el mantenimiento de este
producto deben ser efectuados por personal idóneo siguiendo las normas
aplicables en cuanto a instalaciones eléctricas y plomería. English Español Français
The SJE MilliAmpMaster™ El SJE MilliAmpMaster™ Le MilliAmpMaster™ WPS
PRECAUCION RIESGO DE INCENDIO O EXPLOSIÓN WPS is a control float WPS es un interruptor de SJE est un régulateur
No utilizar con líquidos inflamables. Instalar de acuerdo con ANSI/NFPA 70.
Adecuado para uso con extensiones de circuitos intrínsecamente seguros switch designed de flotador de control de niveau à flotteur conçue
según lo definido por UL 698A. for potable water diseñado para aplicaciones pour les applications en
applications. de agua potable. eau potable.
El incumplimiento de estas precauciones podría provocar lesiones graves o mortales. The internal switching El mecanismo de Le mécanisme interne de
Reemplazar el producto inmediatamente si el interruptor, el peso del cable o el cable se mechanism contains conmutación interno l’interrupteur utilise une
dañan o se agrietan. Conserve estas instrucciones con la garantía después de la instalación. gold cross-point contiene contactos de technologie de contact en
Este producto debe ser instalado de acuerdo con el Código Eléctrico Nacional, ANSI / NFPA
70 para evitar que la humedad entre o se acumule dentro de los gabinetes, conductos,
contacts, providing puntos de cruce de oro, que croix dorée assurant un
accesorios, carcaza del flotador o el cable. precision and reliable proporcionan precisión y contrôle précis et fiable
RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE control up to 1 amp. control confiable de hasta jusqu’à 1 ampère.
AVERTISSEMENT
Débrancher l’alimentation avant d’installer ou d’entretenir ce produit. Seule Common alarm or 1 amperio. Destiné à des applications
une personne qualifiée est habilitée à installer et entretenir ce produit control applications Las aplicaciones más de contrôle ou d’alarme
selon les codes électriques et de plomberie en vigueur. include storage tanks, comunes de alarma y/o telles que les réservoirs
water treatment, control incluyen tanques de stockages, le traitement
AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE D’INCENDIE OU D’EXPLOSION programmable logic de almacenamiento, des eaux, les automates
Ne pas utiliser avec des liquides inflammables. Installer en accordance controllers (PLCs), tratamiento de agua, programmables, et les
avec ANSI/NFPA 70. Peut-être utilisé dans un circuit de sécurité or applications using controladores lógicos applications utilisant
intrinsèque tel que défini par UL 698A.
solar power. programables (PLC) o l’énergie solaire.
This narrow-angle aplicaciones que utilizan Ce régulateur de niveau
Ignorer ces précautions, et ne pas les suivre attentivement pourrait résulter en blessures control fl oat switch energía solar. à angle de commutation
graves, voire mortelles. Remplacer immédiatement le produit si le câble, ou le poids, ou le
flotteur est endommagé ou fissuré. Une fois le produit installé, conserver ces instructions activates/deactivates Este interruptor de étroit active/désactive
avec la garantie. Ce produit doit être installé conformément aux codes électriques des États- at approximately 1.5” flotador de control l’interrupteur à
Unis (NEC), ANSI NFPA 70 de sorte à empêcher l’humidité de s’infiltrer ou de s’accumuler (4 cm) above and below de ángulo estrecho approximativement 4 cm
dans les boitiers, conduits électriques, raccords, à l’intérieur du flotteur, ou du câble. horizontal with a 3.5” (9 se activa / desactiva (1.5 pouce) au-dessus ou en
cm) tether. aproximadamente a 1.5”(4 dessous de l’axe horizontal
Specifications It is not sensitive to cm) por encima y por avec un câble d’attache
Especificaciones rotation. debajo de la horizontal d’une longueur de 9 cm
Spécifications con una traba de 3.5” (9 (3.5 pouces).
cm). No es sensible a la Le flotteur n’est pas
SJE MilliAmpMaster™ WPS rotación. affecté par la rotation.
Control Float Switch SJE RHOMBUS® FIVE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY
Interruptor de flotador SJE MilliAmpMaster WPS ™
Five-Year Limited Warranty. For complete terms and
Régulateur de niveau à flotteur SJE MilliAmpMaster™ WPS conditions, please visit www.sjerhombus.com.
GARANTÍA LIMITADA DE CINCO AÑOS DE SJE RHOMBUS®
Electrical: Eléctricas: Électriques :
Cinco años de garantía limitada. Para consultar los términos y
125 VAC / 1 A 125 VAC / 1 A 125 V c.a. / 1 A condiciones, visite el portal www.sjerhombus.com.
30 VDC / 0.1 A 30 VDC / 0.1 A 30 V c.c./ 0.1A GARANTIE LIMITÉE DE CINQ ANS SJE RHOMBUS®
Garantie limitée de 5 ans. Pour en savoir plus au sujet des
Minimum Carga Charge termes et conditions, visitez www.sjerhombus.com.
Electrical eléctrica électrique
Load: mínima: minimale :
125 VAC / 125 VAC / 125 V c.a. /
0.160 mA 0.160 mA 0.160 mA
For technical support: +1-800-746-6287
30 VDC / 30 VDC / 30 V c.c. / [email protected]
0.160 mA 0.160 mA Technical Support Hours: Monday - Friday, 7 A.M. to 6 P.M. Central Time
0.160 mA Soporte técnico, Horario: lunes a viernes, 7 A.M. a 6 P.M. hora del Centro
5 VDC / 5 VDC / 5 V c.c./ Support technique, Horaires : du lundi au vendredi, de 7 h à 18 h Heure du Centre
PN 1062716A 07/19
1 mA 1 mA 1 mA © 2019 SJE, Inc. All rights reserved.
SJE RHOMBUS is a trademark of SJE, INC.
Items Needed / Elementos necesarios / Éléments nécessaires
Included with SJE MilliAmpMaster™ WPS Control Float Switch Not Included
Incluidos con el interruptor de flotador SJE MilliAmpMaster™ WPS No incluido
Inclus avec l’interrupteur à flotteur SJE MilliAmpMaster™ WPS Pas inclus

A SJE MilliAmpMaster™ WPS Float Switch


SJE MilliAmpMaster™ WPS, Interruptor de flotador / Interrupteur à flotteur C

B Cable Clamp Assembly


Collier de serrage / Conjunto de abrazadera de cable

C Wire nut
Tuerca para cables / Serre-fils

Position the cable clamp at the desired Tighten the hose clamp.
activation level. Apretar la abrazadera de la manguera.
Coloque la abrazadera de cable en el nivel de activación Serrez le collier de serrage
deseado.
Positionnez le point d’encrage au niveau d’activation
souhaité.

Approximate activation level of


1.5 inches (4 cm) above or below
horizontal.
Nivel de activación aproximado de 1,5
pulgadas (4 cm) por encima o por debajo
de la posición deseada horizontalmente.
L’ activation de l’interrupteur est à un
niveau approximatif de 4 cm (1.5 pouce) au-
dessus ou en dessous de l’axe horizontal.

tether length - 3.5 inches (9 cm)


longitud de la traba mínima de 3,5’’ (9 cm)
attache de 3,5 po de long minimum (9 cm)

Select wires to be used. Use wire nut to insulate unused wire and check installation. Allow system
to cycle to insure proper operation.
Compruebe la instalación. Permita que el sistema haga un ciclo completo para asegurar el funcionamiento correcto.
Vérifier l’installation. Laisser le système marcher en s’assurant qu’il fonctionne correctement.

WARNING: Insulate unused wire with wire nut. Unused wire may become electrically hot during use.
ADVERTENCIA: Aislar el cable no utilizado con una tuerca para cables. El cable no utilizado se calentará durante su uso.
AVERTISSEMENT : Isoler le fil non utilisé avec un serre-fils isolant. Le fil non utilisé sera sous tension pendant l’utilisation.
NEGRO (N.O.)

NEGRO (N.O.)
BLACK (N.O.)

BLACK (N.O.)
NOIR (N.O.)

NOIR (N.O.)
ROUGE (N.C.)

ROUGE (N.C.)
BLANCO (C)

ROJO (N.C.)

BLANCO (C)

ROJO (N.C.)
RED (N.C.)
BLANC (C)
WHITE (C)

RED (N.C.)
BLANC (C)
WHITE (C)
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EXPLOSION OR FIRE HAZARD
Disconnect power before installing or servicing this Do not use this product with flammable liquids.
product. A qualified service person must install and Do not install in hazardous locations as defined by
service this product according to applicable electrical National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
and plumbing codes.

Failure to follow these precautions could result in serious injury or death. Replace product immediately if switch cable becomes damaged
or severed. Keep these instructions with warranty after installation. This product must be installed in accordance with National Electric Code,
ANSI/NFPA 70 so as to prevent moisture from entering or accumulating within boxes, conduit bodies, fittings, float housing, or cable.

For detailed specifications on this product, or for the complete line of SJE-Rhombus®
panel, alarm, and switch products, visit our web-site at www.sjerhombus.com.

CORD SEAL INSTALL FLOAT BRACKET INSTALL Figure C


1. Pass the cables through the 2" or 2½" 1. Drill holes in mounting surface float
terminal adaptor. 1-5/16 inches apart vertically. switch
2. Route cables through the seal, 2. Install the mounting bracket to
leaving adequate cable to work with. the mounting surface using two cable
See Figure A. fasteners shown in Figure E. weight tether
NOTE: If all hole positions are not NOTE: Use stainless steel length*
used, plug open position(s) in the fasteners appropriate for the
cord seal with the PVC plug(s) mounting surface. *Control Switches:
provided. 3. Snap the cord lock onto the cable Recommended tether length is
3. Insert the cord seal into the terminal shown in Figure E. 4 inches (10 cm)
adaptor and tighten hex nut until 4. Drop the cord lock and cord into the
adequate strain relief is achieved. *Pump Switches:
top side of a desired hole in the float
4. Gather all ground wires, including Minimum recommended tether length
bracket as shown in Figure F.
ground conductor on the cord seal 5. Adjust the cord to the proper length, is 3.5 inches (9 cm)
and secure to ground terminal. so that activation occurs at the
CABLE WEIGHT INSTALL
desired level. Figure D
6. To lock the cord in place, turn the
1. Lay cable in weight as shown in cord lock clockwise as shown in
Figure B. Figure F.
2. Align clip with weight groove and slide 7. Slide the float bracket into the
clip towards cable as shown in Figure mounting bracket slots as shown in
B. Snap clip snugly up to cable and Figure F.
manually force clip to tightest possible 8. Confirm the float cords are set at
position. a proper height to insure correct
3. See Figure C for proper tether length. activation/deactivation levels.

CABLE CLAMP INSTALL Figure A


1. Determine the required cord PVC Plug
tether length according to product Figure E
Ļ

specifications.
2. Place the cord into the clamp as
shown as shown in Figure D.
3. Locate clamp at desired activation
level and secure the clamp to the
discharge pipe as shown in
Figure D.
Note: Do not install cord under
hose clamp.
ĸ Cable
4. Tighten the hose clamp using
screwdriver. Over tightening may
result in damage to the plastic Figure B
clamp. Make sure the float cable
is not allowed to touch the excess
hose clamp band during operation. Figure F
5. Wire switch as shown in the Wiring
Diagrams.
6. Check installation. Allow system to
cycle to insure proper operation. Slide
float bracket into
mouting bracket

Note: All hose clamp components


are made of 18-8 stainless steel
material. See your SJE-Rhombus® Turn
supplier for replacements. clockwise
to lock
into
place

Instl. Instr. PN 1041933A


©SJE-Rhombus Printed in USA 09/14
1234526
178958 3 5 36 
'!(&-'""& )"
-& 178
5 .34 26
958 3 5 36 
28 82 4 , /01&!+-)&!!



"&)"2'3001/4
4

 
  
!

&% (&2
)"%)
$$
" #$%&&  , ! !&-5" )

'! ')'!! 
 %(&, &+ # )+!
&"())*&!+" 6'!&--'

"")""!! 
)&)+&)

% 
,
,

L>MNOPQRNSTUV>N>S 7jkjl7m_7j;X7Wn7789::
WX;;YOZ[\]SN>\^YOTQ joojmWYpjqlWjnerf:rbfbb
_`ab8c@S]U^;QXQR@debf js;Y7lWYXcqlWjnerf:rbfb9
7@TU>\]>S^Yceghi8 W>t>uU@O>n8ievbb9v9gw:

C
xyzy{|}C|~~{€|}CC{‚ƒ‚„ †CC7@[OZoN‡>S=t<\\k[VuR<\NO\V<O[A<T][S>\‡aWX;;
YOZ[\]SN>\^YOTQk>><]]<TU>ZtN\]@A<uuS@M>ZV@Z>t\Q

ˆy‰|Š}‹C
 
WU>\>uS@Z[T]\<S>S@[OZ\[Vu‡<\NO\T@O\]S[T]>Z@AAN‡>S=t<\\QWU>a<S><M<Nt<‡t>NOM<SN@[\
ZN<V>]>S\<OZZ>u]U\QWU>V>]<tT@M>S\^\>T[S>Z‡a<At<O=><OZ‡@t]\^<S>V<Z>A@S\NO=t>@S]`NO
u[VuV@[O]NO=\^<OZ<M>O]T@OO>T]N@OQm<\]NS@OT<[tŒNO=U[‡\<\`>tt<\\]<NOt>\\\]>>t@S
>O<V>tT@<]>ZuNu>T@[utNO=\<S><M<Nt<‡t><\\NZ>NOt>]\Q9ŽNOZ@vŽ>tZ7N‡‡@Ok><t>S<uutN>Z
‡>]`>>O]U>V>]<tT@M>S<OZ‡<\NOuS@MNZ>\<`<]>Sv]N=U]@NO]<OZ>O<‡t>\]U>\[Vu‡<\NO
<\\>V‡ta]@V>>]]U>:fvA@@]U><ZuS>\\[S>]>\]u>Sk>T]N@OheQi:bQb@A]U>P@\lO=>t>\;t[V‡NO=
m@Z>Pl;m‘^bfbfjZN]N@OQ

WU><uuS@M<tN\\[‡>T]]@]U>A@tt@`NO=T@OZN]N@O\n

:QWU>\>\[Vu\V<a‡>NO\]<tt>Z@OtaNOut[V‡NO=ZS<NONO=\a\]>V\^\[TU<\qŽp^S<NO`<]>S
<OZ\[‡\[SA<T>ZS<NO<=>Q

bQWU>\>\[Vu\\U<tt‡><Z>’[<]>taS>\]S<NO>Z`U>S>]U>=S@[OZ`<]>St>M>tV<aT<[\>At@]<]N@OQ

9Q;[Vu\\U<ttO@]S>\]@O]U>‡@]]@V@A]U>‡<\NO[Ot>\\]U>‡@]]@VN\\[uu@S]>Z@O<O<Z>’[<]>^
t>M>tT@OTS>]>‡<\>Q

eQlTT>\\^<\S>’[NS>Z‡a]U>P@\lO=>t>\jt>T]SNT<tm@Z>^\U<tt‡>uS@MNZ>ZA@SV<NO]>O<OT><OZ
S>u<NS@A<Oa>t>T]SNT<t>’[NuV>O]Q

8QŽU>S><Oau@S]N@O@A]U>u[VuN\t@T<]>Z`N]UNO:fA>>]@A<uS@u>S]atNO>^‡><SNO=`<tt^@S]U>
]@>@A<\t@u>`UNTU>dT>>Z\A@[SA>>]NOM>S]NT<tU>N=U]^]U>t@T<]N@O<OZ\N“>@A><TU
NO\]<tt<]N@O\U<tt‡>NOZNT<]>Z@Out<O\<uuS@M>Z‡a]U>R[NtZNO=;t<OmU>TŒk>T]N@O@A]U>
;>SVN

]<OZjO=NO>>SNO=R[S><[Q
7789::
  ;<=>?@ABC
" 5)*DEFG$1/H1IH/0/1JK"%"&(%!&&!!(*--%!'!&%"&(


0122456789 845
 887858
&'(5"96)9(57659(878(7 659("756"5865
57"#*5(8"#"5 9

+15,9(-' 56"' 6"58(7869) 59( 9". 569(85

/(878(06)9( 55999(69"9(878(")59(
123452674898:;<3219=<>?@AA<B3C4;78D9;=<B36EF<23C<7G9<2HH8IH8D279<1IC9J<341K98<LG989<MD;DKJ9<
#"589"57"88



NOPQRPPOST%

0(- (50895U"9",. ) 659989"980(8"6798(. 59896
5"65)9(895664V2-12W0(9 56"58979"5 X7.599"9(9
 86,9(U"8V58-75Y"675X79,8959(##9.588679,56
8#9,

"9(8Z 5 V".9".6"55,56.67"58979"5"[959(Y9,"#U"8
V58555 "589""#9(\ 9 59"#76556#9,7890
6959"59(9"569"58"#9(Z 5 V". X7 69"".6X7.5,(.
 5 959(8"#("58979"5"[9756 "586 9"5

0(8".8596756 9"58]*^^]*+^+]*+^/]*+^]]*+^^56
]*+WW"#9(U"8V58275Y"6 W^W^69"5569"5]W&^"#9(U"8
V58765Y"6 W^W^69"5



V".6,





4 52"" 
- (50895U"9",
2 95655 57 7




%
%
% %
 
 
2!"#$%

0122456789 845
 887858
%&''$()*+%,(-./$()01$
,,23!44$
$
5(.%$&6$7'',&8-*$9&*-5.$:;<=>$?@AA<BC?$DDD/$6$EFG$.HI$

J4KL1M

 NOPPPL N
QROPPPLQR
SOPPPLS
TOPPPLT
RQOPPPLRQ
RNOPPPLRN
TSOPPPLTS
UQOPPPLUQ
VTOPPPLVT
 QSOPPPL QS



WXKY

PPPZ85Y 9[55[8
Z 88J59"99"55
Z9 
Z\9 
MZ\]9[86^59
Z85L"^ 
_WZW[9Y79̀"69 
_aZa ^`Y79̀"69 
_2Z"62"`"`5
2Z\2"`"`5
WZW[9Y79̀\
aZa ^`Y79̀\
_Z"6 88
JZ\9 ]9[788
YJZY7\9 
aZ 88a9[L"^ 
aZ9 a9[
aJZJ757a9[
_Z"69 

 
 
2!"#!$

P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindustries.com

Fiberglass Basin Installation Reference Guide

PURPOSE
The purpose of this is to provide a brief reference to the recommended methods and procedures for installing Topp
Industries’ underground sump and sewage basins to ensure that damage or premature failure of the basin does not occur.

Studies conducted by both environmental regulatory agencies and trade organizations demonstrate that the most
significant source of leaks and failures in underground storage systems is improper handling and installation. Proper
handling and installation requires practical experience combined with strict adherence to proven methods and procedures.

This guide is not intended to serve as a basin instructional manual. The installation of our sump and sewage basins is a
specialized skill, and it is assumed that the individuals who install our products and refer to this guide will have a basin
understanding of such procedures as excavating, backfilling, pipefitting and electrical work. No amount of written
instruction by a manufacturer or a regulatory agency will convert an inexperienced, under supervised laborer into a
skilled, experienced mechanic. The ability to recognize and correctly respond to abnormal conditions during a basin
installation requires field experience as well as mechanical aptitude.

In addition to proper system engineering and competent manufacturing, the use of basin installers who have both practical
experience and integrity to insist that the basin be installed properly constitutes the greatest protection from catastrophic
basin failure and liability exposure.

DISCLAIMER
Every reasonable effort has been put forth by Topp Industries, Inc. and its agents to ensure the accuracy and reliability of
the information contained in this reference guide. However, neither Topp Industries, Inc., its agents, or its consultants
make any representation, warranty, or guarantee in connection with the publication of these recommended methods and
procedures. Topp Industries, Inc. hereby disclaims any liability for loss or damage resulting from their use; for the
violation of any federal, state, county or municipal regulations with which these recommended methods and procedures
may conflict; or for the infringement of any patent resulting from the use of these recommended methods and procedures

These handling and installation instructions are not intended to preclude normal safety procedures, which should be
followed to prevent injury to personnel. SAFE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES SHALL BE ENTIRELY THE
RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER.

MATERIAL HANDLING
GENERAL HANDLING. Although the exterior surfaces of our fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) sump and sewage
basins are designed to withstand normal handling, they can be damaged during transportation and installation. Basins
must not be dropped, dragged or handled with sharp objects and with the exception of the minimal movement involved in
a visual inspection, should not be rolled.

If the basin or its shell is damaged, installation should be suspended until a determination of the extent of damage can be
made by Topp Industries, Inc. or its agent. Any repairs must be first authorized in writing by Topp Industries, Inc. and
then be done in accordance with Topp Industries, Inc. instructions.
P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindustries.com

MATERIAL HANDLING, continued


UNLOADING, LIFTING AND LOWERING. The proper way of moving a basin is by lifting it, using chains or cables
with the optional lifting lugs (not more than 30° included angle) or by using a non-marring sling around the basin. Before
any attempt is made to move the basin, it should be established that all the equipment and accessories have sufficient
capacity and reach to lift and lower the basins without dragging and/or dropping. Basins should be maneuvered with
guide ropes attached to the sides.

WARNING! Under no circumstances is the use of chains or cables around the basin shell permitted.

STORAGE. Basins should be stored in a secure, controlled area where the potential for accidental damage or vandalism
will be minimized. The storage area should be free from sharp objects, rocks and any other foreign solutions or materials
that could cause damage to the basins. Chock the basins until they are needed for installation and if windy conditions are
possible, secure the basins with non-marring restraints of a size and number adequate for securing the basin.

PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION. Basins, valves, equipment and piping materials should be physically and
visually inspected prior to installation. Adherence to the project’s specifications should also be confirmed before
installation. If the basin or any of its internal components are damaged, installation should be suspended until a
determination of the extent of damage can be made by Topp Industries, Inc. or its agent. Any repairs must be first
authorized in writing by Topp Industries, Inc. and then be done in accordance with Topp Industries’ instructions.

EXCAVATING
EXCAVATING. The excavation should provide adequate space for the basin, piping and other buried equipment and for
the placement and compaction of backfill materials particularly around the basin walls. The size, shape and wall slope of
the excavation should be determined by soil conditions, depth of excavation, shoring requirements, and, if workers are
required to enter the excavation, safety considerations and federal, state, county and municipal regulations.

WARNING! Locate all overhead and underground utilities before excavating.

LOCATION OF EXCAVATION. Excavation for an underground basin should be made with due care to avoid
undermining foundations of existing structures and contact with underground utilities. In the absence of building codes or
regulations, maintain a minimum distance of five feet plus a slope of 45° from the bottom of the compacted sub-base to
the bottom of the adjacent structures, foundations, footings and property lines (as shown in the attached illustration).
Additional distances may be required to assure that any loading carried or created by the foundations and support cannot
be transferred to the basins.

MAXIMUM BURIAL DEPTH. If burial depth is greater than the basin height, contact Topp Industries, Inc. to
determine if additional wall reinforcement is required and secure written authorization.

HANDLING OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS. Excavated materials, which cannot be removed from the jobsite,
should be carefully stored as far from the edge of the basin excavation as possible. Unless approved for use as backfill,
excavation materials should be securely stored separate from approved backfill materials.

WORK AREA SAFETY. Safe installation procedures shall be the sole responsibility of the basin installer. Work safety
requirements are defined in U.S. Department of Labor 29 CFR part 1926, subpart P, Excavations.
P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindustries.com

BACKFILLING
GENERAL. Careful selection, placement and compaction of approved backfill material are critical to a successful basin
installation. Among common problems associated with basin leaks and premature failures are:
• Use of an incorrect backfill material.
• Inadequate or improper placement or compaction.
• Rocks, clods or debris left in the excavation or basin.
• Voids under or around the perimeter of the basin.
• Failure to prevent the migration of backfill materials.

PLACEMENT OF BASIN. The bottom of the basin excavation should be covered with suitably graded, leveled and
compacted backfill material to a depth of at least 12 inches (compacted sub-base). If a concrete hold-down/anti-floatation
pad is required, this bedding can be reduced to a depth of at least 6 inches. The basin should then be carefully lowered
into the excavation and centered on the compacted backfill or concrete pad (see attached illustration).

WARNING! Placement of a basin on a concrete pad or compacted sub-base smaller than the total basin bottom area or on
intermediate supports (saddles) will cause uneven distribution of loads. This may contribute to structure failure and is
never permitted.

BACKFILL MATERIAL. Backfill material should be clean, well granulated, free flowing, non corrosive and inert. It
should be free of ice, snow, debris, rock, or organic material, all of which could damage the tank and interfere with the
compaction of the backfill material. The largest particles should not be larger than ¾ inch. Not more than 3 percent (by
weight) should pass through a #8 sieve, and the backfill material should conform to ASTM C-33, Paragraph 9.1
requirements. Approved backfill materials include:
• Pea Gravel, naturally rounded particles with a minimum diameter of 1/8 inch and a maximum diameter of ¾
inch.
• Crushed Rock, washed and free-flowing angular particles between 1/8 inch and ½ inch in size.

PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION OF BACKFILL. Compaction of backfill materials should be adequate to ensure
the support of the tank and to prevent movement or settlement. Backfill materials should be placed in 12 inch lifts and
compacted to a minimum soil modulus of 700 pounds per square foot (psf).

SUPPORTING PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES. Support for piping, equipment and other accessories
must be provided during backfilling. Using the basin to support piping, equipment, cribbing, bracing or blocking is never
permitted. During backfilling, temporary supporting materials must be carefully installed and removed to prevent damage
to the basin, piping or equipment.

WARNING! Using the basin to support any loading carried or created by piping, equipment, cribbing, bracing or
blocking is never permitted.

ANCHORAGE
GENERAL. When basin installations are located in areas subject to high water tables or flooding, provision should be
made to prevent the basins, either empty or filled, from floating.
P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindustries.com

ANCHORAGE, continued
The buoyancy force to be offset is determined primarily by the volume of the basin. The principle offsetting factors
include:
• Backfill materials.
• Concrete hold-down pad.
• Friction between the tank, backfill materials and the surrounding soil.

METHODS OF ANCHORING. All methods of anchoring basins use the weight of the backfill materials to offset the
buoyancy forces. The use of supplemental mechanical anchoring methods (a concrete hold-down pad) increases the
amount of backfill ballast which is mechanically attached to the basin. The recommended method of attachment is to pour
concrete grout over the basin’s anti-floatation flange and concrete hold-down pad (see attached illustration).

ANCHORAGE REQUIREMENTS. Requirements for anchorage, thickness of concrete hold-down pads, as well as the
size of anchors and reinforcement must be calculated for each installation based on the environmental conditions of that
specific installation.

WARNING! Use “submerged” material weights when calculating anchorage requirements.


Example: weight of concrete (150 pounds per cubic foot) minus the weight of the water (62.4
pounds per cubic foot) equals a “submerged” weight of 87.6 pounds per cubic foot.
P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindustries.com
Utility Swing & Spring Check Valves

Features - PVC White & PVC Clear


Spears® Utility Swing Check and spring assisted Utility
Spring Check Valves offer a compact, high performance
check valve for Landscape & Irrigation, Pool & Spa,
Aquaculture, OEM and many general purpose applications.
These maintenance free sealed units feature long-life EPDM
elastomer seats with weighted disc for full-flow with minimal
restriction and positive shutoff. Spring assisted “Spring
Check” model incorporates a positive-pressure spring to
assist in valve closing without slamming. Produced from
PVC White or PVC Clear material with Socket, Threaded
or SR Threaded end connectors. Available in IPS Sizes 1/2"
through 8" for Swing Check Valves and 1/2" through 4" for
Sample Engineering Specification Spring Check Valves.

All thermoplastic check valves Shall be Utility Swing Check • Chemical & Corrosion Resistant PVC White or High
or Utility Spring Check type constructed form PVC Type I, Visibility PVC Clear Construction
ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 12454. All valves shall • No Metal Parts on Swing Check - Stainless Steel
be maintenance free seal unit construction with EPDM Spring on Spring Check
seat and weighted disc. All Spring Check Valves shall have
• Maintenance Free Sealed Unit in a Compact Space
stainless steel spring assisted operation. All valves shall Saving Design
have external flow arrow direction designation. All valves
shall be certified by NSF International for use in potable • Engineered for Maximum Flow, Quick Response &
Positive Shutoff
water service. All valves shall be pressure rated to 150 psi
for water @ 73°F in full flow (open) position and to 75 psi • Long-Life, High Grade EPDM Seat with Weighted Disc
@ 73°F back pressure (closed), as manufactured by Spears® • Spring Assisted Spring Check Model Option for
Manufacturing Company. Positive Closing
• Sizes 1/2" – 8" Pressure Rated to 150 psi @ 73°F
Full-Flow (open) and 75 psi @ 73°F Back Pressure
(closed)
• Suitable for either Horizontal or Vertical Up-flow
Installations and Vacuum Service
• NSF® Certified for Potable Water Use
• Silicone-Free Assembly

Quick-View Utility Swing Check Quick-View Utility Spring Check


Valve Selection Chart Valve Selection Chart
Valve Seat PVC Material1 Pressure Valve Seat PVC Material1 Pressure
Size Material Socket Threaded SR Threaded Rating Size Material Socket Threaded SR Threaded Rating
1/2 EPDM S1520-05 S1520-05F S1520-05FSR 1/2 EPDM S1580-05 S1580-05F S1580-05FSR
3/4 EPDM S1520-07 S1520-07F S1520-07FSR 3/4 EPDM S1580-07 S1580-07F S1580-07FSR 150 psi
150 psi @ 73°F
1 EPDM S1520-10 S1520-10F S1520-10FSR 1 EPDM S1580-10 S1580-10F S1580-10FSR
@ 73°F Full Flow
1-1/4 EPDM S1520-12 S1520-12F S1520-12FSR 1-1/4 EPDM S1580-12 S1580-12F S1580-12FSR (Open)
Full Flow
1-1/2 EPDM S1520-15 S1520-15F S1520-15FSR (Open) 1-1/2 EPDM S1580-15 S1580-15F S1580-15FSR
2 EPDM S1520-20 S1520-20F S1520-20FSR 2 EPDM S1580-20 S1580-20F S1580-20FSR 75 psi
75 psi Back
2-1/2 EPDM S1520-25 S1520-25F S1520-25FSR 2-1/2 EPDM S1580-25 S1580-25F S1580-25FSR
Back Pressure
3 EPDM S1520-30 S1520-30F S1520-30FSR 3 EPDM S1580-30 S1580-30F S1580-30FSR (Closed)
Pressure
4 EPDM S1520-40 S1520-40F S1520-40FSR (Closed) 4 EPDM S1580-40 S1580-40F S1580-40FSR
6 EPDM S1520-60 S1520-60F S1520-60FSR 1: For PVC Clear Spring Check, replace dash (-) separator with the letter “C” in the
part number (e.g. S1580C05), (e.g. S1580C05F) or (e.g. S1580C05FSR)
8 EPDM S1520-80 N/A N/A
1: For PVC Clear Swing Check, replace dash (-) separator with the letter “C” in the
part number (e.g. S1520C05), (e.g. S1520C05F) or (e.g. S1520C05FSR)

NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION OF COMPRESSED AIR OR GAS


1127 Progressive Products from Spears® Innovation and Technology Spears® Manufacturing Company
Utility Swing & Spring Check Valves

Utility Swing Check Valve

A D

B B
C

Utility Spring Check Valve FLOW

A D

B B
C

Dimensions
Dimension Reference (inches, ± 1/16)
Nominal
B D
Size A C
Socket Threaded/SR Threaded Swing Spring
1/2 1-3/8 2-19/32 2-5/8 4-3/32 2-1/8 2-5/8
3/4 1-3/8 2-5/32 2-1/16 4-1/16 2-1/8 2-5/8
1 1-11/16 2-5/16 2-15/16 4-9/16 2-5/8 2-5/8
1-1/4 2-1/16 2-15/16 3-5/8 5-1/2 3-3/8 3-3/8
1-1/2 2-7/16 3 3-11/16 5-5/8 3-3/8 3-3/8
2 3 3-5/8 4-3/8 6-3/8 4-1/4 4-1/4
2-1/2 3-9/16 4-3/8 5-1/4 7-7/8 5-1/8 5-1/8
3 4-5/16 4-11/16 5-5/8 8-7/16 5-3/4 5-3/4
4 5-1/4 6 7-1/16 10-1/16 6-3/8 6-3/8
6 7-11/16 8-1/2 11-5/16 14-9/16 9-1/4 N/A
8 9-7/16 11-3/16 N/A 19-1/4 11-15/16 N/A

General Installation Information: Utility Swing check valves are designed for horizontal installations,
but may be installed in up-flow only vertical position. Check valves MUST be installed with the valves
FLOW arrow pointing in the direction of the flow. Do not install valve upside down. Flow velocity should
not exceed 5ft./sec. Minimum opening pressure less than 0.5 psi.

Temperature Pressure Rating


System Operating 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
Temperature °F (°C) (38) (43) (49) (54) (60) (66) (71) (77) (82) (88) (93) (99)

Valve 150 135 110 75 50 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
Pressure (1.03) (.93) (.76) (.52) (.34) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-)
1/2" - 8" PVC
Rating psi 150 140 130 120 -110- -100- -90- -80- -70- -60- -50- -0-
(MPa) (1.03) (.97) (.90) (.83) (.76) (.70) (.62) (.55) (.48) (.41) (.34) (-0-)

NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION OF COMPRESSED AIR OR GAS


Made in the U.S.A. Progressive Products from Spears® Innovation and Technology 1128
TRUE UNION BALL VALVES
(REGULAR STYLE)

Features – PVC, CPVC


This versatile, quarter-turn shutoff valve is well suited
for industrial and chemical processing applications.
Available in IPS Sizes 1/2"- 4" with socket, threaded or
flanged end connectors. 6" Venturied valve (4" valve with
4 x 6 adapter) available with either socket or flanged end
connection. Also available with metric 20mm - 110mm
or 1/2" - 4" BSP threaded end connectors.

• Chemical & Corrosion Resistant PVC or CPVC


Construction
• Schedule 80 Full-Bore Design
• Strong, Buttress Thread Union Nuts
• Fully Serviceable, Replaceable Components
Sample Engineering Specification • Spears® Safe-T-Blocked® Seal Carrier

All thermoplastic ball valves shall be True Union type • Self Adjusting PTFE Floating Seat Design
constructed from PVC Type I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification • EPDM or FKM O-rings
12454 or CPVC Type IV, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification • High Impact Polypropylene Handle
23447. All O-rings shall be EPDM or FKM. All valves shall • Spears® Safe-T-Shear® Stem Design
have Safe-T-Shear® stem and double stop Polypropylene
handle. All valve union nuts shall have Buttress threads. All seal • Sizes 1/2" - 2" Pressure Rated to 235 psi @ 73°F,
carriers shall be Safe-T-Blocked®. All valve components shall Sizes 2-1/2" - 6" and all flanged Pressure Rated to
150 psi @ 73°F
be replaceable. All EPDM valves shall be certified by NSF®
International for use in potable water service. All 1/2" - 2" • EPDM valves NSF® Certified for Potable Water use
valves shall be pressure rated at 235 psi and all 2-1/2" - 6" and • Suitable for Vacuum Service
all flanged valves shall be pressure rated at 150 psi for water • Assembled with Silicone-Free, Water Soluble
at 73°F, as manufactured by Spears® Manufacturing Company. Lubricants
• Manufactured to ASTM F 1970

Quick-View Valve Selection Chart


Valve O-ring PVC Part Number1 Pressure Optional Accessories*
Size Material Threaded Socket Flanged Rating

EPDM 2329-005 included 2323-005 • Round Safety Handle


1/2
FKM 2339-005 included 2333-005 • Stem Extension Kit
EPDM 2329-007 included 2323-007 235 psi
3/4
FKM 2339-007 included 2333-007 Non-Shock
Water
• 2" Square / T-Style
1
EPDM 2329-010 included 2323-010 @ 73°F Operator Nut
FKM 2339-010 included 2333-010
EPDM 2329-012 included 2323-012 (Flanged * See “BALL VALVE ACCESSORIES” section for details
1-1/4 150 psi of individual products.
FKM 2339-012 included 2333-012 Non-Shock)
EPDM 2329-015 included 2323-015 Water
1-1/2 @ 73°F
FKM 2339-015 included 2333-015
EPDM 2329-020 included 2323-020
2
FKM 2339-020 included 2333-020
EPDM 2321-025 2322-025 2323-025
2-1/2
FKM 2331-025 2332-025 2333-025
EPDM 2321-030 2322-030 2323-030
3 150 psi
FKM 2331-030 2332-030 2333-030 Non-Shock
EPDM 2321-040 2322-040 2323-040 Water
4 @ 73°F
FKM 2331-040 2332-040 2333-040
62 EPDM --- 2322-060 2323-060
venturied FKM --- 2332-060 2333-060
1: For CPVC valves, add the letter “C” to part numbers listed (e.g., 2339-005C).
2: Consists of 4" True Union Ball Valve with two 4" x 6" Adapters.

24
TRUE UNION BALL VALVES
(REGULAR STYLE)

E
Replacement Parts
1 2 3
No. Component Qty. Material
4
1 Handle 1 PP
5 2 Stem 1 PVC/CPVC

12 6 3 Stem O-ring 1 EPDM/FKM


D
11 4 Stem Bearing* 1 PP
5 Union Nut 2 PVC/CPVC
6 Seat** 2 PTFE
A F
7 Ball 1 PVC/CPVC
8 Body 1 PVC/CPVC
9 Carrier O-ring 1 EPDM/FKM
10 10 Seal Carrier 1 PVC/CPVC

9 8 7 11 End Connector 2 PVC/CPVC


B 12 End Connector O-ring 2 EPDM/FKM

C * Sizes 1-1/4" and larger.


** Seat O-ring (not shown) on sizes 2-1/2" and larger.
G

Dimensions, Weights, Operating Torque & Cv Values


Dimension Reference (inches, ± 1/16) Approx. Wt. (Lbs.) Oper.2
Nominal Cv4 Values
PVC CPVC Torque
Size A B1 C D E F G
Soc/Thd Flanged Soc/Thd Flanged (in.-lb.) Soc/Thd Flanged
1/2 2-9/16 3-7/16 5-3/16 2-13/32 2-23/32 3-1/2 3-15/32 1.05 1.23 .95 1.14 20 25 18
3/4 3-1/32 4-1/16 6-3/16 2-5/8 3-3/16 3-7/8 4 1.44 1.64 1.50 1.73 30 51 36
1 3-13/32 4-5/16 6-9/16 2-13/16 3-23/32 4-1/4 4-5/16 1.91 2.22 2.08 2.43 40 97 67
1-1/4 3-11/16 4-1/2 7-1/16 2-31/32 4-1/8 4-5/8 4-19/32 2.38 2.78 2.52 2.91 60 204 142
1-1/2 4-3/8 5-5/16 8-1/32 3-9/32 4-15/32 5 5-9/32 3.63 4.00 3.82 4.26 80 285 201
2 5-3/16 5-13/16 8-13/16 4-13/32 5-1/4 6 5-23/32 5.40 6.14 5.70 6.54 90 540 381
2-1/2 7-7/16 8-3/8 11-7/8 4-29/32 9-7/8 7 7-3/16 12.87 14.26 13.44 15.85 300 712 512
3 7-7/16 8-3/16 11-15/16 4-29/32 9-7/8 7-1/2 7-11/32 13.24 15.67 13.85 16.96 300 1294 925
4 8-15/16 8-11/16 13-3/16 5-19/32 10-13/16 9-1/16 8-5/32 19.58 24.32 20.49 25.83 400 2629 1868
6 Socket3 8-15/16 19-5/8 26-1/16 6-3/4 10-13/16 11-1/4 14-11/16 22.66 30.98 26.11 34.78 400 N/A N/A
6 Flanged3 11-3/16 29-3/8 N/A 6-3/4 10-13/16 11-1/4 14-11/16 N/A N/A N/A N/A 400 N/A N/A
1: Valve Lay Lengths.
2: Torque required at valve maximum internal pressure rating, 5 ft./sec. flow velocity.
3: Consists of 4" True Union Ball Valve with two 4" x 6" Adapters.
4: Gallons per minute at 1 psi pressure drop. Values calculated from valve laying length, based on derivative of Hazen-Williams equation with surface roughness factor of C=150.
Cv Valves for 6" venturied flange and socket valves are not available.

Temperature Pressure Rating


System Operating 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
Temperature °F (°C) (38) (43) (49) (54) (60) (66) (71) (77) (82) (88) (93) (99)
235 211 150 75 50 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
PVC
Valve (1.62) (1.45) (1.03) (.52) (.34) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-)
1/2" - 2"
Pressure 235 219 170 145 130 110 90 80 70 60 50 -0-
CPVC
(1.62) (1.51) (1.17) (1.00) (.90) (.76) (.62) (.55) (.48) (.41) (.34) (-0-)
Rating
150 135 110 75 50 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
psi PVC
(1.03) (.93) (.76) (.52) (.34) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-)
(MPa) 2-1/2" - 6"
150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 -0-
CPVC
(1.03) (.97) (.90) (.83) (.76) (.70) (.62) (.55) (.48) (.41) (.34) (-0-)
NOTE: Flanged Valves have a base pressure rating of 150 psi.

NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION OF COMPRESSED AIR OR GASES


25
RM
RM
PIPE
SIZE

FIBERGLASS
BASIN WALL
ALUMINUM
BOLT-ON
SLEEVE
PIPE

LINKSEALS

STANDARD DIAMETER SDR35 PVC PIPE


NO. OF
NOMINAL ACTUAL LINKSEAL
SLEEVE MODEL NO. LINKS PER
PIPE SIZE PIPE SIZE SEAL
4 4.22 6 LS-315 10

6 6.28 10 LS-410 10

8 8.40 12 LS-475 12

10 10.50 14 LS-475 14

12 12.50 16 LS-425 12

RM
FIBERGLASS
BASIN WALL

ALUMINUM
BOLT-ON
SLEEVE
PIPE

LINKSEALS

STANDARD DIAMETER SDR35 PVC PIPE


NO. OF
NOMINAL ACTUAL LINKSEAL
SLEEVE MODEL NO. LINKS PER
PIPE SIZE PIPE SIZE SEAL
4 4.22 6 LS-315 10

6 6.28 10 LS-410 10

8 8.40 12 LS-475 12

10 10.50 14 LS-475 14

12 12.50 16 LS-425 12
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE NITRILE
PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTOR

PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS


What It Is

PSX: Direct Drive Nitrile is a high-performance


flexible pipe-to-manhole connector that offers
easy installation and long-term performance in
one convenient product.

With the added ability to resist common


underground contaminants including
hydrocarbons and many mixed chemistries.

Whether you core or cast your holes, PSX:


Direct Drive Nitrile fits right into your production
methods, ready to seal your toughest
applications every time.

How It Works

• The connector fits into a cast or cored hole.


• A power sleeve made from tempered
series 304 stainless steel expands with a
certified installation wrench.
• Take-up clamps made from series 304
stainless steel with quick adjusting screws
secure the connector to the pipe.

Why It’s Better Where To Use

• Nitrile rubber resists most chemicals and • Manholes


hydrocarbons found in effluent and soils. • Wet wells
• Safely install from outside of the manhole • Square pump and lift stations
preventing falls from crawling down into • Stormwater structures
structures. • On-site treatment structures
• All stainless-steel components with no • Junction chambers
welds or rivets creating a stronger product. • Grease interceptors
• Precision molding provides accurate • Vaults
compensation for hole size variations.
• Contains chemically resistant stainless
steel.
• Contractor can save time and money by
backfilling immediately.

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2022.

21
Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com
Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 02.09.22.8.50
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE NITRILE
SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATIONS
PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS

Pipe-to-Manhole and Structure Connector Specification for Sanitary and Storm Sewer Applications:

All pipe-to-manhole and structure connections shall meet and or exceed ASTM C 923, Standard
Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manholes, Structures, Pipes and
laterals.

All mechanical devices, including castings, bolt assemblies, adjusters shall use non-magnetic 300
series stainless steel with no welds or rivets in its assemblies.

The installation of the connector shall be accomplished at one time and shall require no additional
adjustments or installation at a later time to insure a watertight seal.

Take up clamps shall use non-magnetic 304 series stainless steel and be installed in the field using a
T-Handle Torque wrench set to 60 inch-pounds and installation shall follow manufacturer’s instructions.

The connector shall be PSX: Direct Drive Nitrile and PSX: Nylo Drive Nitrile as manufactured by Press-
Seal Corporation of Fort Wayne, IN or approved equal.

Product Performance
PSX: Direct Drive - Nitrile meets or exceeds all requirements of the following specifications and/or test
methods:

• ASTM C 923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Structures, Pipes, and Laterals
• ASTM C 1619 Class D (Material Spec)
• ASTM C 1244 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure
(Vacuum) Test
• ASTM C 1478 - Standard Specification for Storm Drain Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced
Concrete Storm Sewer Structures, Pipes and Laterals
• ASTM F 2510 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures and Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Drainage Pipes

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2022.

22 Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com


Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 02.09.22.8.50
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE NITRILE
SELECTION GUIDE

PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS


MINIMUM
HOLE SIZE PIPE O.D. TAKE-UP MINIMUM
PSX: DD NITRILE GASKET I.D. SPAN/RISE
RANGE ACCOMMODATION CLAMP SIZE ROUND
SIZE and STRAIGHT
RANGE STRUCTURE
DESCRIPTION WALL
INCH mm INCHES (mm) INCH mm QTY PART # (INCHES/mm)
(INCHES/mm)
REQUIRES BLACK SHORT 7/16” TORQUE WRENCH PRESET TO 12 FT/LBS PART # 850.605

8 QRS STEP “S” NITRILE 1.70” TO 2.50” 43 - 64 mm 2.20 56 mm 1 600-088


8 QRS STEP “R” NITRILE 203- 208 2.75” TO 3.75” 70 - 95 mm 3.50 89 mm 1 600-088
8.00 - 8.20 36 (900 mm) 16 (400 mm))
8 QRS STEP “Q” NITRILE mm 3.75” TO 4.80” 95 - 122 mm 4.60 117 mm 1 600-088
PSX: DD 8 QRS NITRILE 1.70” TO 4.80” 43 - 122 mm N/A N/A 1 600-088

12Y PSX: DD NITRILE 305 - 310 5.70” TO 6.90” 145 - 175 mm 6.50 165 mm 1 600-128
12.00- 12.20 36 (900 mm) 20 (500 mm)
12 M PSX: DD NITRILE mm 8.00” TO 9.10” 203 - 231 mm 8.63 219 mm 1 600-152

356 - 361
14 M PSX: DD NITRILE 14.00 - 14.20 9.75” TO 11.10” 248 - 282 mm 10.35 263 mm 1 600-188 36 (900 mm) 22 (550 mm)
mm

REQUIRES BLUE 1/2” TORQUE WRENCH PRESET TO 20 FT/LBS PART # 850.610

406 - 411 11.36” TO


16L PSX: Direct Drive 16.00-16.20 289 - 318 mm 12.10 307 mm 1 600.232 36 (900 mm) 24 (600 mm)
mm 12.50

406- 411 12.05” TO


16 M PSX: DD NITRILE 16.00 - 16.20 306 - 338 mm 12.75 324 mm 1 600-232 36 (900 mm) 24 (600 mm)
mm 13.30”

457 - 462 14.60” TO


18 M PSX: DD-2 NITRILE 18.00 - 18.20 371 - 394 mm 15.35 390 mm 2 600-296 36 (900 mm) 26 (650 mm)
mm 15.50”

559 - 564 18.00” TO


22 M PSX: DD-2 NITRILE 22.00 - 22.20 457 - 488 mm 18.70 475 mm 2 600-376 42 (1067 mm) 30 (762 mm)
mm 19.20”

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2022.

23
Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com
Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 02.09.22.8.50
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE
SELECTION GUIDE Pipe OD 1.90” - 6.90” (48mm - 175mm)
PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS

HOLE SIZE HOLE SIZE


PIPE PIPE O.D. PSX: DD SIZE
RANGE RANGE
DESCRIPTION INCH DESIGNATION
INCH mm

1.90” 8 QRS
1.5” PVC
48 mm “STEP S” PSX

2.38” 8 QRS
2” PVC
60 mm “STEP S” PSX

2.50” 8 QRS
2” CI/DI
64 mm “STEP S” PSX

2.75” 8 QRS
2.25” CI/DI
70 mm “STEP R” PSX

3.50” 8 QRS
3” PVC 8.00 - 8.20 203- 208 mm
89 mm “STEP R” PSX

3.96” 8 QRS
3” CI/DI
101 mm “STEP Q” PSX

4” (100 mm) PVC D3033 4.21” 8 QRS


OR D3034 107 mm “STEP Q” PSX

4.30” 8 QRS
4” (100 mm) TRUSS
109 mm “STEP Q” PSX

4” (100 mm CI/DI 4.80” 8 QRS


4” (100 mm) C900 PVC 122 mm “STEP Q” PSX

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2022.

12 Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com


Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 02.09.22.8.50
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE
8QRS Direct Drive MULTI-SIZE

PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS


What It Is
CUT HERE TO
ACCOMMODATE
(100 mm) 4” PVC PIPE
CUT HERE TO
ACCOMMODATE
The 8QRS PSX: Direct Drive provides a 3” (75 mm) PVC PIPE
simple method for installing small diameter
pipes into manholes or other structures. ACCOMMODATES
1 1/2” TO 2”
(38 - 51 mm)
The unique design of 8QRS allows it to be PVC PIPE
easily adapted to 1-1/2” to 4” (38 – 100 mm)
PVC pipes, either in the plant or in the field.

The reliable tempered series 304 stainless


steel power sleeve allows for easy adjustment
in almost any 8” cored or cast hole for a
watertight connection.
CLAMP HERE FOR
1 1/2” TO 2”
(38 - 51 mm)

How It Works PVC PIPE


CLAMP HERE FOR
3” (75 mm) PVC PIPE

• Sections are cut off to adapt to different PLACE ONE OR


TWO CLAMPS HERE
PVC pipe sizes. FOR 4” (100 mm) PVC PIPE
• The connector fits into a cast or cored
hole.
• A power sleeve made from tempered
series 304 stainless steel expands with
a certified installation wrench.
• Take-up clamps made from series 304
stainless steel with quick adjusting
screws secure the connector to the pipe.

Why It’s Better

• Adaptability to a range of PVC pipe


sizes all in one connector.
• Safely install the connector from the
outside of the manhole.
• All stainless-steel components with
no welds or rivets creating a stronger
product.
• Precision molding provides accurate
compensation for hole size variations.
• Contractor can save time and money by
backfilling immediately.

NITRILE 8QRS PSX: Direct Drive is available in Oil-Resistant Nitrile rubber.

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2022.

11
Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com
Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 02.09.22.8.50
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS


1. Prepare the hole to receive the gasket.
a. Clean the hole of any debris or loose dirt.
ITEMS NEEDED
b. Examine the hole for any imperfections
(bug holes) and wire ends in the gasket bearing
surface. t-handle torque wrench

c. Patch any voids (bug holes) with patch


compound.
d. Remove any wire protruding up into the
hole and patch with slurry if needed.

2. Select the correct PSX: Direct Drive wrench.


The wrenches and the adjusters are sized so
that only the correct wrench can be used with
each size adjuster, and will provide the correct
torque. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER SIZE
OR TYPE OF WRENCH TO INSTALL PSX:
DIRECT DRIVE. clamp

3. Place the PSX: Direct Drive Connector in the


hole with the adjuster mechanism in position
so that it will be at the top of the hole (10 to
12 o’clock) in the final installed position of the
manhole. Align the Connector so that it is square
to the hole.

4. Place the wrench on the adjuster nut so that the


arm of the wrench is on the installer’s left side.
This will ensure that the proper orientation is boot
maintained.

5. Begin to tighten the PSX:Direct Drive


Connector by pulling the wrench handle toward
the outside of the manhole. The wrench will
ratchet back easily at the end of the stroke. If the
Connector has multiple adjusters (28” (711 mm)
and higher), tighten each adjuster five times,
alternating them in sequence so that installation
pressure is evenly distributed.

6. Continue tightening until proper torque is hex wrench


reached. The wrench will signal this by
“breaking” slightly. If in doubt torque has been
reached, tighten again and wrench should
“break” quickly and easily. If there are multiple
adjusters, make sure that the wrench “breaks” at
each one. Installation is now complete.

TIP: To remove an installed PSX: Direct Drive Connector, simply reverse wrench position and loosen
Connector.

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2020.

19
Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com
Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 09.17.20.929
Section(s):

SUBMITTAL F05UL 1PH 2IN.pdf


PRE-PACKAGED
LIFT STATION
SYSTEM DESIGN AND
SPECIFICATIONS

XXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXX

STORM WATER LIFT STATION


XXXXX GPM @ XXXXX FT
TOH

Submittal for approval by:

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXX

BY DESI Submittal prepared by:


PUMPS BY DESIGN INC

B 909-673-9945
[email protected]

l PUMPS
Important Confidentiality Notice
This document is disclosed only to the recipient t o whom this document is add ressed and is pu rsuant
to a relationship of confidentiality under which the recipient has obligations to confi dentiality. This
document constit utes confidential information and contains proprietary information belonging to
Pumps by Design Inc. The confidential information is to be used by the recipient only for t he purpose
for wh ich t his document is supplied . The recipient must obt ain Pumps by Design Inc' s writt en consent
before the recipient or any other person acti ng on its behalf, communicate any information on t he
cont ent s or the subject matter of this document or part t hereof to any th ird party. The t hird party t o
whom the communication is made includes individual, fi rm or company or an employee or employees
of such a firm and company.

The recipient, by it s receipt of t his document, acknowledges t hat t his document is confidential
information and cont ains proprietary informatio n belonging t o Pumps by Design Inc and furt her
acknowledges it s obligat ion to comply wit h th e provisio ns of t his notice .

The content s of t his docume nt are provided in commercial confi de nce, solely for t he purpose
of evaluating whether t he contract shou ld be awarded to Pumps by Design Inc

The informa t ion contai ned in th is document rep rese nts t he views and op inio ns of Pumps by
Design Inc on the issues discussed, as of t he date of pub licat ion. Due t o t he dynam ic nat ure of
t he industry and t he technology t hat it depe nds upon, Pumps by Design Inc makes no
wa rra nt y as t o t he lo ng term accuracy of t he assessme nts made herein.

PUMPS BY DESIGN INC - Confidential


Table of Submittal’s Details
1. Shop Drawing, Calculations
2. Pump Details
3. Controls Panel Specifications and Schematics
4. Wet Well and Cover
5. Valves and Fittings
6. Tank Accessories and supports

PUMPS BY DESIGN INC - Confidential


1. Shop Drawing, Calculations

Submittal Package

Manufacturer:

Phone: 909-673-9945

Job: BY DESI

B
Al PUMP SO

Pumps By Design Inc.


2045 S. Baker Ave. Ontario CA 91761 pumpsbydesign .com
2. Pump Details

Submittal Package

Manufacturer:

Phone: 909-673-9945

Job: BY DESI

B
Al PUMP SO

Pumps By Design Inc.


2045 S. Baker Ave. Ontario CA 91761 pumpsbydesign .com
Last updated 1/1/20 Model F-05UL

Motor Specifications
Motor design Air-filled
Applications Effluent water
Insulation Class Class B
Max Liquid Temp 0–40º C (32–104º F)
Frequency 60 Hz
RPM 3600

Pump & Motor Data


Impeller Vortex
Solid Size 2”
Discharge 2”
Motor 2 Pole
kW • Hp 0.4 kW • 0.5 Hp
Phase 1&3
Cable VCT or SJOW/SOW • 30/20 ft
Protection Auto-cut

Materials of Construction
Motor Housing SUS 304
Impeller ASTM A48
Volute ASTM A48
Rotor SUS 403
Hardware 316 SS
O-Rings BUNA “N”
Upper Bearing Roller bearing
Lower Bearing Roller bearing
Mechanical Seal Silicon/Silicon (Lower)
Carbon/Ceramic (Upper)

Dimensions & Weight


Pump Weight 35 lbs
Max Submergence 100 ft
Optional Float switch

1Ø AMP 115V 6.4 A 3Ø 230V 2.2 A


208V 3.4 A 460V 1.1 A
230V 3.2 A 575V 1.0 A
HCP Pumps , 4 ~ F SERIES
DIMENSIONS No: S2F0U208030-00
MODEL:F-0SU/21 U 1flJ/3flJ

C.W.L.

:::c
C)

L.W.L.

lL
Thread
NPT

Dirnensions-rrrn Weig-it:kg
Model d A B D E F G H WT1 (~Set DN DB DC DD (n)Qn WT2
F-05U 1¢ 50 237 199 154 99 111 371 425 16 EF2-96 50 96 121 12 2 1
F-05U 3¢ 50 237 199 154 99 111 371 425 15 EF2-96 50 96 121 12 2 1
F-21U 1¢ 50 237 199 154 99 111 371 425 17 EF2-96 50 96 121 12 2 1
F-21U 3¢ 50 237 199 154 99 111 371 425 16 EF2-96 50 96 121 12 2 1

Dimensions-inch Weig-it:b
Model d A B D E F G H WT1 (~Set DN DB DC DD (n)Qn WT2
F-05U 1¢ 2 9¾ 7~ 6¼ 31/a 4¾ 14% 16,,. 35 EF2-96 2 3¾ 4"• ½ 2 1
F-05U 3¢ 2 9¾ 7~ 6¼ 31/a 4¾ 14% 16,,. 33 EF2-96 2 3¾ 4"• ½ 2 1
F-21U 1¢ 2 9¾ 7~ 6¼ 31/a 4¾ 147'a 16,,. 37 EF2-96 2 3¾ 4,,. ½ 2 1
F-21U 3¢ 2 9¾ 7~ 6¼ 31/a 4¾ 14% 16,,. 35 EF2-96 2 3¾ 4,,. ½ 2 1

C.W.L.:Ccnti11JCJUS RUTiing Water Level WT1:Purp Weig-it(Withcut Cd:Jle)


L.W.L.:Lowest RUTiing Water Level WT2:Ebow Set Weig-it
HCP Pumps , 4 ~ F SERIES
DIMENSIONS NO: S2F0U20803T-00
MODEL:F-OSU & F-21 U 1S&3S

---------------- ~

----------------- ~

M10llE40L-
I '
I
I
I

I I
K "I
.. III·
I I

UJ
rn C.W.L.

iii, , ,
I I

-rl
-rl :r:
3:
L.W.L.

NN
:r: 3:

M16llE120L-4 DN DB DC DD {n)QT
50 96 121 12 2
01
Dimensions-inch
(F Ebowset DN DB DC DD (n)QT
EF2-96 2 3}'. 4¾ ½ 2

Dimensioos-nrn Weig1t:Kg
GRS
Model d A B C D E F G I J J! K L M 01 p Pl W! W2 H! H2 H3 H4 WT! Set WT2
F-05U 1¢ 50 417 334 45 154 190 155 60 45 70 110 :¾" 40 201 110 5 55 390 130 444 19 165 13 16 T2-50 9
F-05U 3¢ 50 417 334 45 154 190 155 60 45 70 110 :¾" 40 201 110 5 55 390 130 444 19 165 13 15 T2-50 9
F-21U 1¢ 50 417 334 45 154 190 155 60 45 70 110 :¾" 40 201 110 5 55 390 130 444 19 165 13 17 T2-50 9
F-21U 3¢ 50 417 334 45 154 190 155 60 45 70 110 :¾" 40 201 110 5 55 390 130 444 19 165 13 16 T2-50 9

Dimensioos-inch Weig1t:Lbs
GRS
Model d A B C D E F G I J J! K L M 01 P P1 W! W2 H! H2 H3 H4 WT! Set WT2
F-05U 7½ 6¼ 6½ 72 35
F-05U


2
2
16¼ 11.3¼
16¼ tl3¼
1¾ 6Xs
1¾ 6Xs
1¼ 6Xs




2¾ 1¾ 2¾
2¾ 1¾ 2¾
4:)£.

¾
¾
11/18 7'Xa
1% 7'Xa
1% 7'Xa
4½a
4½a
¾a 2½. 15¾ 57a 17½
}-18 2¾a 15¾ 57a 17½
¾a 2¾a 15¾ 57a 17½
"·"·
6½ 72 33
6½ 72 37
T2-50 19
T2-50 19
F-21U
F-21U


2
2
16¼ 11.3¼
16¼ 11.3¼ 1¼ 6Xs 7½ 6¼
2¾ 1¼ 2¾
2¾ 1¼ 2¾
4~.
4:)£.
¾
¾ 11/18 7'Xa
4½a
4½a ¾a 2½. 15¾ 57a 17½ "·"·
6½ 72 35
T2-50 19
T2-50 19

C.W.L.:Cootiruous Ru,ning Water Level WT!:Purp Weig1t(Wi-1:hout Cable)


L.W.L.:Lowest Ru,ning Water Level WT2:GRS Set Weig1t
HCP Pumps , 4 ~ F SERIES
SECTIONAL VIEWS No: 02F0U205010-10
MODEL: F-05U 10

No. Part name Material QTY Remark No. Part name Material QTY Remark
01 Cable 1 25 Oil seal NBR 1
03 Upper cover FC200 1 26 Casing FC200 1
06 Bracket FC200 1 27 Impeller FC200 1
07 Stator 1 41 Handle ABS 1
09 Shaft end SUS410 1 46 Impeller key SUS304 1
14R Capacitor 1 47 Packing
16 Motor frame SUS304 1
17 Lubricant
19 Bearing bracket FC200 1
20A Bearing 1
208 Bearing 1
21 M. seal £A/CE& 1
~iC '/ SiC
23 M. seal bracket FC200 1
HCP Pumps , 4 ~ F SERIES
SECTIONAL VIEWS No: 02F0U208030-00
MODEL: F-05U & F-21 U 30

No. Part name Material QTY Remark No. Part name Material QTY Remark
01 Cable 1 25 Oil seal NBR 1
03 Upper cover FC200 1 26 Casing FC200 1
06 Bracket FC200 1 27 Impeller FC200 1
07 Stator 1 41 Handle ABS 1
09 Shaft end SUS410 1 46 Impeller key SUS304 1
10 Auto-cut 1 47 Packing
16 Motor frame SUS304 1
17 Lubricant
19 Bearing bracket FC200 1
20A Bearing 1
208 Bearing 1
~A I CE &
21 M.seal SiC '/ SiC 1
23 M. seal bracket FC200
FILE NO. PC-FT-E6-F05UL1
PUMP PERFORMANCE CURVES
F-05UL VER. NO. AI0710
MODEL
STANDARD SPECIFICATION REFERENCE SPECIFICATION
FREQUENCY 60 Hz
DISCHARGE 2 inch / 50 mm
OUTPUT 0.5 HP / 0.4 kW HP kW
HEAD 13 ft
CAPACITY 52 GPM
PHASE/VOLTAGE 1 Ø 110 V 115 V 208 V 220 V 230 V Ø V
RATED CURRENT 6.6 A 6.4 A 3.4 A 3.3 A 3.2 A A
POLE / rpm 2 P / 3400 rpm
START METHOD CAPACITOR
INSULATION CLASS B
REMARK

25 100

90
HEAD
20 80

70

15 60

EFF.
HEAD

50

ft 10 40 %

30
EFF.
5 20

10

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

CAPACITY GPM

0.6
OUTPUT

0.4

0.2
kW
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
CAPACITY GPM

HCP PUMP MANUFACTURER CO., LTD.


&,
\.....RUMPS
I"/~ Last updated 1/1 /20 Model F-OSUL

Motor Specifications
Air-fi lled
Motor design
Effluent water
Applications
Class B
Insulation Class
0-40° C (32- 104° F)
Max Liquid Temp
60 Hz
Frequency
3600
RPM

Pump & Motor Data


Vortex
Impeller
2"
Solid Size
2"
Discharge
2 Pole
Motor
0.4 kW • 0.5 Hp
kW• Hp
3
Phase
VCT or SJOW/SOW • 30/20 ft
Cable
Auto-cut
Protection

Materials of Construction
Motor Housing SUS 304
Impeller ASTM A48
Volute ASTM A48
Rotor SUS 403
Hardware 316 ss
0-Rings BUNA " N"
Upper Bearing Roller bearing
Lower Bearing Roller bearing
Mechanical Seal Silicon/Silicon (Lower)
Carbon/Ceramic (Upper)

Dimensions & Weight


Pump Weight 35 lbs
Max Submergence 100 ft
Optional Float switch

10AMP 115V 6.4 A 30 230V 2.2 A


208V 3.4 A 460V 1.1 A
230V 3.2 A 575V 1.0A
HCP Pumps , 4 ~ F SERIES
DIMENSIONS NO: S2F0U20803T-00
MODEL: F-05UL 30

--~
-- ~

M10llE40L 2 4,
I I I

I I

K "I
7rr
UJ
rn C.W.L.

iii
j ii
1 1 I
I I
.....
..-, I
31::

NN
I 31::

Dimensions-mo
M16llE120L 4 P Pl Etx,,wset DN DB DC DD n)OT
EF2-96 50 96 121 12 2
01
Dimensions-n::h
o:-& set DN D8 DC DD )OT
EF2-96 I 2 13"• 14¾ I ½ I 2

Dimensicns-nm Weig-it Kg
GRS
Model d A 8 C D E F G I J Jl K L M 01 P Pl Wl W2 Hl H2 H3 H4 WT1 Set WT2
F-05U 1115 50 417 334 45 154 190 155 60 45 70 110 w
40 201 110 5 55 390 130 444 19 165 13 16 T2-50 9
w
F-05U
F-21U
F-21U
3115
1115
3115
50
50
50
417
417
417
334
334
334
45
45
45
154 190 155
154 190 155
154 190 155
60
60
60
45
45
45
70
70
70
110
110
110
~
~--
40 201 110 5 55
40 201 110 5 55
40 201 110 5 55
390 130 444
390 130 444
390 130 444
19
19
19
165
165
165
13
13
13
15
17
16
T2-50 9
T2-50 9
T2-50 9

Dimersicns-n::h Weigit:Lbs
GRS
Model d A 8 C D E F G I J Jl L K M 01 P Pl Wl W2 Hl H2 H3 H4 WT1 Set WT2
F-05U 1115 2 16¼ ~3¼ 1¾ 6¼ 7½ 6¼ 2¾ 1¾ 2¾ 4¼ ~ 1¼ 7"1t 4'1. ½a 2'!. 15¾ 5¼ 17½ 7• 6½ ½ 35 T2-50 19
F-05U 3115 2 16¼ 13¼ 1¾ 6¼ 7½ 6¼ 2¾ 1¾ 2¾ 4¾ ~ 1¼ 7"1t 4'1. ~ 2'!. 15¾ 5¼ 17½ 7• 6½ ½ 33 T2-50 19
F-21U 1115 2 16¼ 113¼ 1¾ 6¼ 7½ 6¼ 2¾ 1¾ 2¾ 4¼ ~ 1¼ 7"1t 4'1. ½• 2'!. 15¾ 5¼ 17½ 7• 6½ ¼ 37 T2-50 19
F-21U 3115 2 16¼ 113¼ 1¾ 6¼ 7½ 6¼ 2¾ 1¾ 2¾ 4'- ~ 1¼ 7"1t 4'1. ½• 2'!. 15¾ 5¼ 17½ 7• 6½ ¼ 35 T2-50 19

C.W.L.:Con'alUlUS Runing Weta- Level WTl:PUTp Weigit(\\11hout Ccble)


L.W.L.:Lo,rest Ruring Weta- Level WT2:GRS Set Weig,t
HCP Pumps I"/~ F SERIES
SECTIONAL VIEWS No: 02F0U208030-00
MODEL: F-0SUL 30

No. Part name Material QTY Remark No. Part name Material QTY Remark
01 Cable 1 25 Oil sea l NBR 1
03 Upper cover FC200 1 26 Casing FC200 1
06 Bracket FC200 1 27 Impeller FC200 1
07 Stator 1 41 Handle ABS 1
09 Shaft end SUS410 1 46 Impeller key SUS304 1
10 Auto-cut 1 47 Packing
16 Motor frame SUS304 1
17 Lubricant
19 Bearing bracket FC200 1
2OA Bearing 1
2OB Bearing 1
21 M.seal CA~<l:~ 1
~ Sl:

23 M. seal bracket FC200


3. Controls Panel Specifications and Schematics

Submittal Package

Manufacturer:

Phone: 909-673-9945

Job: BY DESI

B
Al PUMP SO

Pumps By Design Inc.


2045 S. Baker Ave. Ontario CA 91761 pumpsbydesign .com
WD1P-4-1022
Duplex Single Phase:
120/208/240VAC
7.0-15.0 FLA
NEMA 4X ENCL.
ALARM, THERMAL RELAY, 4-FLOAT OPERATION

Submittal Package

Manufacturer: See Water, Inc.

Phone: 951.487 .8073


Fax: 951.487.0557

Job:

See Water, Inc .


22220 Opportu nity Way, Suite 101 Riverside CA, seewaterinc.com
925 18
WS Series®Duplex Control Panels

WS Series® duplex control panels will control two


120/208/240V single phase or two 208/240/480V three
phase pumps designed for dewatering, wastewater, and
sewage applications. See Water duplex control panels come
standard with a clear front NEMA 4X rated enclosure, IEC
rated contactors, and motor protective switches. All panels
are UL listed for the United States and Canada, and come
standard with a five-year warranty.

SERIES

Features Applications
Indoor/outdoor NEMA 4X panel enclosure: Heavy Sewage pump chambers
duty polycarbonate with stainless steel lockable latches Grinder pumps
Duplex provides Two-pump alternation and high demand Sump pump basins
two-pump operation Lift stations
Pump control visible indicators: Pump #1 and #2 hand-off-auto
(H.OA) switch, green Pump Run lights, red Pump Fault lights with
reset button, and Power On light
Alarm visible indicators High red beacon alarm light, alarm test and
silence buttons
Alarm horn sounds at 85 decibels at 10 feet
Remote monitoring by dry contacts High Liquid, Pump Run(s), and
Pump Fault(s)
Upgraded pump protection: Motor protective switches included
for both pumps (branch circuit protection, adjustable overload and
disconnect) and thermal cutout with indicators
UL listed for the United States and Canada

Call us toll-free at 888.733.9283 to speak


with one of our expert Sales Engineers. c@us LISTED ~
951.487.8073 / 888. 733.9283 www.seewaterinc.com [email protected]

See Water Inc 122220 Opportunrly Way Surte 101 I Rrversrde CA 92518 !u.'r ftt.\ ftt.\
© 2021 See Water Inc All nghts reserved ~ "' \!!ioas •l.'!Y 18

REV.()322
WS Series®Duplex Control Panels

Duplex Single Phase: 120/208/240VAC


Typical Installation of WS Series®Duplex Control Panel
Model Pump Full Load Amp Rating
WD1P-4-1021 0.0-7.0 FLA WS Series• Duplex Control Panel
WD1P-4-1022
WD1P-4-1023
7.0-15.0 FLA
15.0-22.0 FLA
.. .
•• • C>

WD1P-4-1024 22.0-28.0 FLA


WD1P-4-1025 28.0-36.0 FLA
Note: Thermal overload protection is generally provided in single phase pumps. To request
a specific overload on the single phase models, contact the factory. Each panel includes a
motor protective switches that will provide accurate pump circuit breaker protection.

Duplex Three Phase: 208/240/ 480VAC


Model Pump Full Load Amp Rating
High Liquid Alarm Float
WD3P-4-3021 1.0-1.6FLA
WD3P-4-3022 1.6-2.5 FLA
Lag Pump Float
WD3P-4-3023 2.5-4.0 FLA
WD3P-4-3024 4.0-6.3 FLA
Lead Pump Float
WD3P-4-3025 6.0-10.0 FLA
WD3P-4-3026 9.0-14.0 FLA
Pump Stop Float
WD3P-4-3027 13.0-18.0 FLA
WD3P-4-3028 17.0-23.0 FLA
WD3P-4-3029 20.0-25.0 FLA
WD3P-4-3030 24.0-32.0 FLA
Submersible Pump #1 Submersible Pump #2
WD3P-4-3031 30.0-40.0 FLA
WD3P-4-3032 37.0-50.0 FLA
WD3P-4-3033
WD3P-4-3034
48.0-65.0 FLA
65.0-115.0 FLA
WJSERIES

Custom Options
Option(s) Description Option(s) Description
24 Pump Exerciser LAD/LAW Lightning Secondary Surge Arrestor (LAD Delta/ LAW Wye)
28 Power On Dry Contact (Normally Open) LL Low Level Alarm
3R Painted Steel Enclosure MD Main Disconnect; Up to 125 FLA
AF Alarm Flasher MD2 Main Disconnect; 125 to 200 FLA
AH Anti-Condensation Heater PM Phase Monitoring
C Additional Cord Length Per Foot Per Component" PX Pump Portal® Wireless Remote Communication
CCD Cycle Counter w/LCD Display and Reset SFD Seal Failure Circuit w/ Indicator Lights
co Convenience Outlet (User to supply 120 VAC) S3 No Floats Option
ETD Elapsed Time Meter w/ LCD Display and Reset SS4 Upgraded Enclosure (304 Stainless Steel)
GR Generator Receptacle, Includes Transfer Switch SS6 Upgraded Enclosure (316 Stainless Steel)
ISO Intrinsically Safe
*Additional cord length greater than 20': Specify after C. Example. WD1P-4-1021-C50. Indicates 50' cord lengths for all floats.
Single Phase Duplex Control Panel
SEE WATER, INC. Installation and Operation manual
WDlP-4-1022

WS Series® Duplex Control Panel Panel Installation:


The WS Series® Duplex control panels will control two pumps in sewage, 1. Caution : To maintain the environmental rating,
wastewater, and dewatering applications. All panels are UL Listed for the make all wiring connections with seal tight cable
United States and Canada and come with a five-year warranty. grips or conduit connections.
2. Run pump cables and floats cables through
conduit . Make field connections as shown on wiring
Model FLA Range schematic.
3. Run power line conduct or through conduit . Wire t o
terminals per enclosed schematic.
WDlP-4-1021 (0.0-7. 0 FLA) 4. Branch circuit prot ection to be provided by
installer.
WDlP-4-1022 (7 .0-15.0 FLA) 5. Panel circuit breakers are shipped in th e closed
position.
6. Floats are properly mounted at the correct levels.
WDlP-4-1023 ( 15.0-22.0 FLA) Note: Floats shall have free ra nge of motion
without touching each ot her or other equipment .
WDlP-4-1024 (22.0- 28 .0 FLA) 7. Connect service conductors 120/208/240VAC to
proper location.

WDlP-4-1025 (28 .0- 36.0 FLA) Note for Intrinsically Safe Panels: cable grips or
conduit connections from hazardous locations must
be installed directly below the respective field wiring
WDlP-4-1026 (37.0-50.0 FLA) terminals to ensure intrinsically safe rating. Equipment
from hazardous locations must be ra n in separate con-
WDlP-4-1027 (48.0-65.0 FLA) duit from other equipment .

Enclosure Mounting: TYPE 4X RATED

Mounting Brackets - A mounting bracket and screw pack are provided


with the premium enclosures. To assemble, turn the enclosure upside down
on a flat surface, place the mounting bracket over the square boss either
horizontally or vertically, and fasten the mounting bracket with the 1/4"-20
x 0.5 SS, countersunk phillips drive screws or vertically, with th e mounting
brackets in any config., using any acceptable fasteni ng technique.

Covers/Doors - Covers/doors have a gasket pre-assembled to seal against


th e base.

Note: The control panel should not be mounted in a location that may be
&WARNING
subject to submersion.

~-
Electrical Shock Hazard!
• Disconnect power and lock out unit
prior to servicing.
• Replace a nd secu re acce ss pa nel
before operating.
• Failure t o follow proper safety
procedures could result In death or
www.seewaterinc.com serious Inj ury.
951.487.8073 • 888.733.9283 • [email protected]
22220 Opportunity Way, Suite 101 • Riverside, CA 92518

Page 1-3 IM 751 REV. 9/21


Single Pha se Duplex Control Panel
SEE WATER, INC. In stallati on and Operation manual
WDlP-4-1022

Sequence of Operation: Additional Panel Options:


1. When the 'Stop' and ' Lead' float contact closes, pump # 1 will energize and 24 = Pump Exerciser
the pump # 1 run light will illuminate. Pump # 1 will rema in operational 28 = Power On Dry Contact (Normally Open)
until the 'St op' float opens. 3R = Paint ed Steel Enclosure
2. The next time th e 'Stop' and 'Lead' floats are closed the automatic pump Al = Pre-wire power t o circuit board
alternation circuit will energize pump #2 and the pump #2 run light will A2 = I nst all motor protectors and cont actors outside of
illuminate. Pump #2 will remain operational until the 'Stop' float opens. list ed FLA range
3. If the flu id level continues to rise aft er the first pump has been energized, AF = Alarm Flasher
the 'Lag' float will close. When the ' Lag' float has been closed, the second AH = Anti Condensation Heat er
pump will turn on . Both pumps will remain operational until th e 'St op' C = Additional Cord Length Per Foot Per Component*
float opens. CCD = Cycle Counter w/ LCD Display & Reset
4. If the level continues to rise, the 'High' float will alarm. This will illuminate co = Convenience Outlet (User to supply 120 VAC)
the 360 degree visible beacon and sound an 85 decibel at 10' buzzer. ETD = Elapsed Time Meter w/ LCD Display & Reset
GR = Generator Recept acle, I ncludes Transfer Switch
Remote Monitoring Dry Contacts: I SO = I ntrinsically Safe
LAD/ = Light ening Secondary Surge Arrestor
• Normally Open dry contacts for high level, pump #1 run, pump #2 run, LAW (LAD Delta/ LAW Wye)
pump #1 fault, and pump #2 fault. Note: refer to wiring schematic fo r LL = Low Level Alarm
proper terminat ion. MD = Main Disconnect; Up to 100.0 FLA
PM = Phase Monitoring
PX = Pump Portal® Wireless Remote Communication
Typical Installation of WS Series® Duplex Control Panel SFD = Seal Failure Circuit w/ I ndicat or Lights
SS4 = Upgraded Enclosure (304 St ainless Steel)
SS6 = Upgraded Enclosure (316 St ainless Steel)
WS Series® Duplex Control Panel
. ...
• • • 0
S3 = No Floats Option
* Additional cord length greater than 20': Specify after C.
Example: WD1P-4-1021 -C50. Indicates 50' cord lengths
for all floats.

High Liquid Alarm Float

Lag Pump Float

Lead Pump Float

Pump Stop Float

SEEBI!► www.seewaterinc.com
Submersible Pump #1 Submersible Pump #2
951.487.8073 • 888.733.9283 • [email protected]
22220 Opportunity Way, Suite 101 • Riverside, CA92518

Page 2- 3 IM 75 1 REV. 9/21


Single Phase Duplex Control Panel
SEE WATER, INC. Installation and Operation manual
WDlP-4-1022

Notes:

Troubleshooting: Warranty:

Caution: Before checking electrical connections within the control or See Water, Inc. warrants t hat products of its manufact ure are
attempting to replace any components, tum off all branch circuits supplying free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5
power to the main control panel. years from the date of purchase. This date shall be determ ined
by t he date on the invoice and the serial number on the product.
Alarm Circuit:
Replacement of the product is at th e discretion of See Water,
• To test t he alarm light and buzzer, press the test button on the front Inc. This warranty is valid when the product is inst alled in
panel. If either the light or buzzer do not indicat e, replace th e light compliance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
bulb or buzzer with t he same type. The manufacturer's obligation under this warranty shall be
limit ed to th e repair or rep lacement of any parts found by
Control Board and Fuse: the manufacturer to be defective, provided that the product
is returned to See Water, Inc.'s fact ory, postage prepaid with
• If the power on light is not illuminat ing on th e front panel, check the proof of original purchase included.
voltage at TSl-1 and TSl- 2 with a voltage meter. The voltage should
read 120VAC. If voltage is present, check the fuse in the fuse box . If The manufacturer of this warranty shall not be liable under this
the fuse is blown, replace f use with same type. The dry contacts are warranty if th e product has not been properly inst alled; any
rated for 120 VAC or 24 VDC, 1 amp max . alterations/additions/changes to the product will result in a void
warranty. Failure to properly inst all and test this product can
Floats: result in personal injury or equipment malfunction.

• The control board has individual float st atus indicat ors th at will See Water, Inc. shall not be liable for any loss, damage or
illuminate when the floats are in the closed posit ion. Check floats for expenses from inst allation or use of its products.
ent anglement , ful l range of motion . Replace damaged floats.

S-•ll!!!"II!!!"--►
-~1 WAI.~
www.seewaterinc.com
951.487.8073 • 888.733.9283 • [email protected]
22220 Opportunity Way, Suite 101 • Riverside, CA92518

Page 3- 3 IM 751 REV. 9/21


REVISIONS

ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED


J UPDATED DRY CONTACT RATINGS 5/4/2 1 JED

,,,......___
'tj-
N
0
..---
L1 L2/h' GND

y y y
..--- ', ', ~
N 00
TB I TB I
25 ~ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - > :.:~ONT.I.CT
0
..---
....__,,, 01 26 101~-------
I I
=l~N:..T
~or--------
- >

I 02 27 > ~Zi~N:..T
'tj--
1
OJ _____
~
1/_Ll,_. 1 ~
M~
1 ______ 1
112/ 11
1
°ie2 - - - - ""o MOTi 28 !o--------- ~,c~-i~i. >

o_
..---
B UILDER NOl E:
RCMOVL L2 L[ G or
B US BAR GV2G25◄
~
~
I
.I l .• .~. .
I
v y.>/LL
4/12
~II
I

'1 4/ 12
I
0~ - - - - -
TB2
J I
1
PUMP I
29 ~ol---- ---- >=l~N~~[,
I I
I
0 05
PR OR TO W1Rl f'ro
MP 1 -MP2
I
5/-IL3' " " . . . . . _ ~ fwrr'
---
I GNO
~- - - -- -
I
..J JO l@t -------< ~f~'!c°i2,voc, 1AMPMAX
5 06 l1

~ M2 1
- - - - - ...,
w 07 . _ . . . __ _ _ _-4----4-_ _ _1_ "Ll4 1 ~
., , I
..L
l'--l
I
I
z-7 1-1 ----~□-
TBl Q M012
PUMP2
l2

2 08
~ I~ 111 47 12
2
Diel - - - - J :
<{
I
z 09 , .......~ twrr'
'--------+-----.1-,.....
I I GNO
~- - - -- -
I
..J l◄

LL
10 l5

11 l6

12 l7

13 l8

" l9

..--- 15 ,o

N
LO
16
"
0 17

18
w
f-
<{
19
"
0 20

>
w 21 ◄6

0:::
22 '7

23 ◄8

◄9

DASHED LINE INDICATES DRAWN BY: DATE:


FIELD W IRING TORQUE SPECS.
FIELD WIRING. MM 11 4 14
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 2,5 5 IN-LB
USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. 7 IN-LB APPROVED BY: DATE:
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 4
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 6 15 IN-LB KM 11 4 14 TITLE:
TEMPERATURE RAT NG OF CONDUCTORS IS TO BE
60°C (140°F) FOR UNDER 100A.
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 10
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 16
15 IN-LB
25 IN-LB THIS DRAWING CONTAINS
WD 1 P- 4 - ( 1 02 1 - 1 024)
75°C (167°F) FOR OVER 1ODA
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 35 30 IN-LB PROPRIETARY INFORMATION CO NTRO L SCH EMATIC
BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE TS1, TS2, J1, J2 & J3 PCB SIN-LB
INSTALLER: MUST BE SIZED ACCORDING TO PUMP/MOTOR TRANSFORMER H1F, H2F & H3F 15 IN-LB
AND SHALL NOT B E USED L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ - -
s IzE DWG NO. PART NO. REV
MANUFACTURING SPECIFICATIONS. TRANSFORMER H1, H2 & H3 10 IN-LB
DS1 VLS3P63-125 R2 45 IN-LB
OR D~~To~s;~1T~~~Ho u T B 1525 WD 1P- 4 - ( 102 1 - 1 024) J
VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION OF CONTROL PANEL AFTER
DS1 LK4JU3CN 100A 36 IN-LB
INSTAUATION IS COMPLETE.
DS1 LK4MU3N 200A 200 IN-LB
AU THORIZATION. SCALE NO N E SHEET 1 OF 2
REVISION S

ZONE REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

J UPDATED DRY CONTACT RATINGS 5/4/2 1 J ED

,,,......___
'tj-
N
0
..---
50 75

..--- ., TG1
76
N FIELD WIRING CONNEC TION S
0 52 77

..---
....__,,, 5l 78

'tj-
I .. TG2
79 TB 1
I qJ ~I TB2
I cp~I TB3
I cp~I
I 55 80
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o_ z'
..--- 56
DISPLAY CA8l E CBL1
f om CBLIP I - A. 81

...=-
~·I
~:
120/208/240VAC
yJ M
yJ M

0 57 82 = 1 - P HASE, 60Hz PUMP PUMP 2


5 58 Bl

w 59 ••
2 TS1 OJ 0 [] GJ @] @] 0 @] 0 [9
<{ 60 85
.,,
z 61 86

I
:i:,
._,
"'•,
a I
LL z,
~ ~ ~ ~
62 87 120/240VAC STOP LEAD LAG HGH LIQUID
1 - P HASE, 60Hz ~~J Ft~ T
(N.O.)
Ft~ T
(N.O.)
Ft~ T
(N.O.)
6l 88

6◄ 89

TS2 OJ 0 [] GJ @] @]
65

66
90

91
~·~·~·~·~·
i:2 i:2 i:2 i:2 i:2 a•
2:~ 2:~ 2:~ 2:~ 2:~
~,
i, o,
I

..--- 67 92 ALARM PUMP1 PUMP 2 PUMP1 PUMP 2120VAC/ PUMP1 PUMP2


N RUN RUN FAULT FAULT 2 4VOC TEMP
1 AMP REMOVE FAC TORY INSTAUCO
TEMP

LO 68 9l MAX JUMPERS WHEN CONNECTING


DRY CON TAC T INDICATORS TCMPLRATUR C INPUTS
0
69 9◄

w 70 95

f-
<{ 71 96

0
>
w
72 97

7l 98
0:::
7' 99

DASHED LINE INDICATES DRAWN BY: DATE:


FIELD WIRING TORQUE SPECS.
FIELD WIRING. MM 11 4 14
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 2,5 5 IN-LB
USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. 7 IN-LB APP ROVED BY: DATE:
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 4
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 6 15 IN-LB KM 11 4 14 TITLE:
TEMPERATURE RAT NG OF CONDUCTORS IS TO BE
60°C (140°F) FOR UNDER 100A.
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 10
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 16
15 IN-LB
25 IN-LB THIS DRAWING CONTAINS
WD 1 P- 4 - ( 1 02 1 - 1 024)
75°C (167°F) FOR OVER 1ODA
TERMINAL BLOCK UT 35 30 IN-LB PROPRIETARY INFORMATION CO NTRO L SCH EMATIC
BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE TS1, TS2, J1 , J2 & J3 PCB S IN-LB
INSTALLER: MUST BE SIZED ACCORDING TO PUMP/MOTOR 15 IN-LB
AN D SHALL NOT BE USED L - - -D- G_ O
_____PA
_ R_T_ N
_O__- - - - - - - - - - ~ -R_E_V _
TRANSFORMER H1F, H2F & H3F
MANUFACTURING SPECIFICATIONS. TRANSFORMER H1, H2 & H3 10 IN-LB
OR DISC LOSED WITHOUT SIZ E w N .

VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION O F CONTROL PANEL AFTER


DS1 VLS3P63-1 25 R2 45 IN-LB PRIOR WRITTEN 8 15 2 5 WD 1P- 4 - ( 102 1 - 1024) J
DS1 LK4JU3CN 100A 36 IN-LB
INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE.
DS1 LK4MU3N 200A 200 IN-LB
AU THORIZATION. SCALE N ON E SH EET 2 OF 2
Float Pro TM Control Switch

The Float ProrM control switch is a narrow angle or


wide angle control switch that is used to monitor liquid
levels in wastewater and sewage applications. The Float
Pro TM series allows for a multitude of different float styles
and functions.

Float Pro TM Control Switches


Float Pro TM Series Control Switches/Floats - Normally Open -
Narrow Angle
Model Type Cord Length Angle
95-43* Normally Open 20' Narrow
95-44 Normally Open 30' Narrow
95-45 Normally Open 50' Narrow
95-46 Normally Open 100' Narrow
Note: 95-43' N/O Narrow Angle Float Switch is standard on WS Series®,
Knight Series®, Hydra®, Parabola®, and Trident® control products.
Float Pro TM Series Control Switches/Floats - Normally Open -
Wide Angle
Model Type Cord Length Angle
95-71 Normally Open 20' Wide
95-72 Normally Open 30' Wide
Call us toll-free at 888.733.9283 to speak
95-73 Normally Open 50' Wide with one of our expert Sales Engineers.
95-74 Normally Open 100' Wide
Float Pro TM Series Control Switches/Floats - Normally Closed - Specifications
Narrow Angle
Electrical Requirements
Model Type Cord Length Angle 5 amps; 125VAC/250VAC, 50/60 Hz
95-80 Normally Closed 20' Narrow
95-81 Normally Closed 30' Narrow Cable Type
50' Flexible 18 gauge, 2 conductor (UL.CSA) SJOW
95-82 Normally Closed Narrow
95-83 Normally Closed 100' Narrow Float Description
Float Pro TM Series Control Switches/Floats - Normally Closed - 2 7/8" diameter, 4 1/2" long, high impact, corrosion-resistant,
Wide Angle polypropylene housing for use in sewage and water up to
Model Type Cord Length Angle 140° F (60°C)
95-86 Normally Closed 20' Wide Maximum Water Depth
95-87 Normally Closed 30' Wide 30' (9 meters), 13 PSI (90 kPa)
95-88 Normally Closed 50' Wide
95-89 Normally Closed 100' Wide c@us LISTED Iii
951.487.8073 / 888. 733.9283 www.seewaterinc.com [email protected]

See Water, Inc I 22220 Opportunity Way, Surte 101 I Rrversrde, CA92518 m.'\ /tt.\ m.'\ ~ ( L:
0 2022 see Water. Inc. An rNJhlSreserved \!.Ii..,. ~as c '!Yus ~ ~

REV.0122
Float Pro TM Control Switch

4 inch
(10 cm)
minimum tether length

4.5 inches

- - 3 inches ------!
J

951.487.8073 / 888. 733.9283 www.seewaterinc.com [email protected]

See Water, Inc I 22220 Opportunity Way, Sune 101 I R1vers1de, CA92518 {II,) /tt.\ /tt.\ ~ ( L:
0 2022 See Water. Inc. An rNJ/11S reseived ~ - ~ " c ~us ~ ~
4. Wet Well and Cover

Submittal Package

Manufacturer:

Phone: 909-673-9945

Job: BY DESI

B
Al PUMP SO

Pumps By Design Inc.


2045 S. Baker Ave. Ontario CA 91761 pumpsbydesign .com
1234526
178958 3 5 36 
'!(&-'""& )"
-& 178
5 .34 26
958 3 5 36 
28 82 4 /01&!+-)&!!



"&)"2'3001/


 
  
!

&% (&2
)"%)
$$
" #$%&&
'! 
! !&-5" )

 ')'!! &+

# )+!
&"())*&!+" %(& 6'!&--'

"")""!! 
)&)+&)

% 



L>MNOPQRNSTUV>N>S 7jkjl7m_7j;X7Wn7789::
WX;;YOZ[\]SN>\^YOTQ joojmWYpjqlWjnerf:rbfbb
_`ab8c@S]U^;QXQR@debf js;Y7lWYXcqlWjnerf:rbfb9
7@TU>\]>S^Yceghi8 W>t>uU@O>n8ievbb9v9gw:

xyzy{|}|~~{€|}{‚ƒ‚„ †7@[OZoN‡>S=t<\\k[VuR<\NO\V<O[A<T][S>\‡aWX;;
YOZ[\]SN>\^YOTQk>><]]<TU>ZtN\]@A<uuS@M>ZV@Z>t\Q

ˆy‰|Š}‹
 
WU>\>uS@Z[T]\<S>S@[OZ\[Vu‡<\NO\T@O\]S[T]>Z@AAN‡>S=t<\\QWU>a<S><M<Nt<‡t>NOM<SN@[\
ZN<V>]>S\<OZZ>u]U\QWU>V>]<tT@M>S\^\>T[S>Z‡a<At<O=><OZ‡@t]\^<S>V<Z>A@S\NO=t>@S]`NO
u[VuV@[O]NO=\^<OZ<M>O]T@OO>T]N@OQm<\]NS@OT<[tŒNO=U[‡\<\`>tt<\\]<NOt>\\\]>>t@S
>O<V>tT@<]>ZuNu>T@[utNO=\<S><M<Nt<‡t><\\NZ>NOt>]\Q9ŽNOZ@vŽ>tZ7N‡‡@Ok><t>S<uutN>Z
‡>]`>>O]U>V>]<tT@M>S<OZ‡<\NOuS@MNZ>\<`<]>Sv]N=U]@NO]<OZ>O<‡t>\]U>\[Vu‡<\NO
<\\>V‡ta]@V>>]]U>:fvA@@]U><ZuS>\\[S>]>\]u>Sk>T]N@OheQi:bQb@A]U>P@\lO=>t>\;t[V‡NO=
m@Z>Pl;m‘^bfbfjZN]N@OQ

WU><uuS@M<tN\\[‡>T]]@]U>A@tt@`NO=T@OZN]N@O\n

:QWU>\>\[Vu\V<a‡>NO\]<tt>Z@OtaNOut[V‡NO=ZS<NONO=\a\]>V\^\[TU<\qŽp^S<NO`<]>S
<OZ\[‡\[SA<T>ZS<NO<=>Q

bQWU>\>\[Vu\\U<tt‡><Z>’[<]>taS>\]S<NO>Z`U>S>]U>=S@[OZ`<]>St>M>tV<aT<[\>At@]<]N@OQ

9Q;[Vu\\U<ttO@]S>\]@O]U>‡@]]@V@A]U>‡<\NO[Ot>\\]U>‡@]]@VN\\[uu@S]>Z@O<O<Z>’[<]>^
t>M>tT@OTS>]>‡<\>Q

eQlTT>\\^<\S>’[NS>Z‡a]U>P@\lO=>t>\jt>T]SNT<tm@Z>^\U<tt‡>uS@MNZ>ZA@SV<NO]>O<OT><OZ
S>u<NS@A<Oa>t>T]SNT<t>’[NuV>O]Q

8QŽU>S><Oau@S]N@O@A]U>u[VuN\t@T<]>Z`N]UNO:fA>>]@A<uS@u>S]atNO>^‡><SNO=`<tt^@S]U>
]@>@A<\t@u>`UNTU>dT>>Z\A@[SA>>]NOM>S]NT<tU>N=U]^]U>t@T<]N@O<OZ\N“>@A><TU
NO\]<tt<]N@O\U<tt‡>NOZNT<]>Z@Out<O\<uuS@M>Z‡a]U>R[NtZNO=;t<OmU>TŒk>T]N@O@A]U>
;>SVN

]<OZjO=NO>>SNO=R[S><[Q
7789::
  ;<=>?@AB
" 5)*DEFG$1/H1IH/0/1JK"%"&(%!&&!!(*--%!'!&%"&(


0122456789 845
 887858
&'(5"96)9(57659(878(7 659("756"5865
57"#*5(8"#"5 9

+15,9(-' 56"' 6"58(7869) 59( 9". 569(85

/(878(06)9( 55999(69"9(878(")59(
123452674898:;3219=>?@AAB3C4;78D9;=B36EF23C7G92HH8IH8D2791IC9J341K98LG989MD;DKJ9
#"589"57"88



NOPQRPPOST

0(- (50895U"9",. ) 659989"980(8"6798(. 59896
5"65)9(895664V2-12W0(9 56"58979"5 X7.599"9(9
 86,9(U"8V58-75Y"675X79,8959(##9.588679,56
8#9,

"9(8Z 5 V".9".6"55,56.67"58979"5"[959(Y9,"#U"8
V58555 "589""#9(\ 9 59"#76556#9,7890
6959"59(9"569"58"#9(Z 5 V". X7 69"".6X7.5,(.
 5 959(8"#("58979"5"[9756 "586 9"5

0(8".8596756 9"58]*^^]*+^+]*+^/]*+^]]*+^^56
]*+WW"#9(U"8V58275Y"6 W^W^69"5569"5]W&^"#9(U"8
V58765Y"6 W^W^69"5



V".6,





4 52"" 
- (50895U"9",
2 95655 57 7





 
2!"#$

0122456789 845
 887858
%&''()*+%,(-./()01
,,23!44
5(.%&67'',&8-*9&*-5.:;<=>?@AA<BC?DDD/6EFG.HI

J4KL1M

 NOPPPL N
QROPPPLQR
SOPPPLS
TOPPPLT
RQOPPPLRQ
RNOPPPLRN
TSOPPPLTS
UQOPPPLUQ
VTOPPPLVT
 QSOPPPL QS



WXKY

PPPZ85Y 9[55[8
Z 88J59"99"55
Z9 
Z\9 
MZ\]9[86^59
Z85L"^ 
_WZW[9Y79̀"69 
_aZa ^`Y79̀"69 
_2Z"62"`"`5
2Z\2"`"`5
WZW[9Y79̀\
aZa ^`Y79̀\
_Z"6 88
JZ\9 ]9[788
YJZY7\9 
aZ 88a9[L"^ 
aZ9 a9[
aJZJ757a9[
_Z"69 

 
2!"#!

LmD
P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindusti·ies.com

Fiberglass Basin Installation Refere nee Guide

PURPOSE
The purpose of this is to provide a brief reference to the recommended methods and procedures for installing Topp
Industries' underground sump and sewage basins to ensure that damage or premature failure of the basin does not occur.

Studies conducted by both environmental regulato1y agencies and trade organizations demonstrate that the most
significant source of leaks and failures in underground storage systems is improper handling and installation. Proper
handling and installation requires practical expe1ience combined with strict adherence to proven methods and procedures.

This guide is not intended to se1ve as a basin instrnctional manual. The installation of our sump and sewage basins is a
specialized skill, and it is assumed that the individuals who install our products and refer to this guide will have a basin
understanding of such procedures as excavating, backfilling, pipefitting and electrical work. No amount of written
instrnction by a manufacturer or a regulato1y agency will conve1t an inexperienced, under supe1vised laborer into a
skilled, expe1ienced mechanic. The ability to recognize and conectly respond to abno1mal conditions during a basin
installation requires field expedence as well as mechanical aptitude.

In addition to proper system enginee1ing and competent manufacturing, the use of basin installers who have both practical
experience and integrity to insist that the basin be installed properly constitutes the greatest protection from catastrophic
basin failure and liability exposure.

DISCLAIMER
Eve1y reasonable effo1t has been put fo1th by Topp Industries, Inc. and its agents to ensure the accuracy and reliability of
the info1mation contained in this reference guide. However, neither Topp Industries, Inc., its agents, or its consultants
make any representation, wan anty, or guarantee in connection with the publication of these recommended methods and
procedures. Topp Industries, Inc. hereby disclaims any liability for loss or damage resulting from their use; for the
violation of any federal, state, county or municipal regulations with which these recommended methods and procedures
may conflict; or for the infringement of any patent resulting from the use of these recommended methods and procedures

These handling and installation instrnctions are not intended to preclude n01mal safety procedures, which should be
followed to prevent injmy to personnel. SAFE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES SHALL BE ENTIRELY THE
RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER.

MATERIAL HANDLING
GENERAL HANDLING. Although the exte1ior smfaces of our fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) sump and sewage
basins are designed to withstand n01mal handling, they can be damaged during transpo1t ation and installation. Basins
must not be dropped, dragged or handled with sharp objects and with the exception of the minimal movement involved in
a visual inspection, should not be rolled.

If the basin or its shell is damaged, installation should be suspended until a dete1mination of the extent of damage can be
made by Topp Industries, Inc. or its agent. Any repairs must be first autho1ized in w1iting by Topp Indust:Iies, Inc. and
then be done in accordance with Topp Industries, Inc. instrnctions.
1.am
P.O . Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindusti·ies.com

MATERIAL HANDLING, continued


UNLOADING, LIFTING AND LOWERING. The proper way of moving a basin is by lifting it, using chains or cables
with the optional lifting lugs (not more than 30° included angle) or by using a non-maning sling around the basin. Before
any attempt is made to move the basin, it should be established that all the equipment and accessories have sufficient
capacity and reach to lift and lower the basins without dragging and/or dropping. Basins should be maneuvered with
guide ropes attached to the sides.

WARNING! Under no circumstances is the use of chains or cables around the basin shell pennitted.

STORAGE. Basins should be stored in a secure, controlled area where the potential for accidental damage or vandalism
will be minimized. The storage area should be free from sharp objects, rocks and any other foreign solutions or materials
that could cause damage to the basins. Chock the basins until they are needed for installation and if windy conditions are
possible, secure the basins with non-maning restraints of a size and number adequate for seeming the basin.

PRE-INSTALLATION INSPECTION. Basins, valves, equipment and piping materials should be physically and
visually inspected prior to instaUation. Adherence to the project's specifications should also be confiimed before
instaUation. If the basin or any of its internal components are damaged, installation should be suspended until a
determination of the extent of damage can be made by Topp Industries, Inc. or its agent. Any repairs must be first
authorized in writing by Topp Industries, Inc. and then be done in accordance with Topp Industries' instmctions.

EXCAVATING
EXCAVATING. The excavation should provide adequate space for the basin, piping and other bmied equipment and for
the placement and compaction of backfill materials part icularly around the basin walls. The size, shape and wall slope of
the excavation should be determined by soil conditions, depth of excavation, shoring requirements, and, if workers are
required to enter the excavation, safety considerations and federal, state, county and municipal regulations.

WARNING! Locate all overhead and underground utilities before excavating.

LOCATION OF EXCAVATION. Excavation for an underground basin should be made with due care to avoid
undermining foundations of existing stmctures and contact with underground utilities. In the absence of building codes or
regulations, maintain a minimum distance of five feet plus a slope of 45° from the bottom of the compacted sub-base to
the bottom of the adjacent stmctures, foundations, footings and property lines (as shown in the attached illustration).
Additional distances may be required to assure that any loading can ied or created by the foundations and support cannot
be transfened to the basins.

MAXIMUM BURIAL DEPTH. If burial depth is greater than the basin height, contact Topp Industries, Inc. to
determine if additional wall reinforcement is required and secure written authorization.

HANDLING OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS. Excavated materials, which cannot be removed from the jobsite,
should be carefully stored as far from the edge of the basin excavation as possible. Unless approved for use as backfill,
excavation materials should be securely stored separate from approved backfill materials.

WORK AREA SAFETY. Safe installation procedures shall be the sole responsibility of the basin installer. Work safety
requirements are defined in U.S. Depart ment of Labor 29 CFR pa.it 1926, subpa1t P, Excavations.
P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindustries.com

BACKFILLING
GENERAL. Careful selection, placement and compaction of approved backfill material are critical to a successful basin
installation. Among common problems associated with basin leaks and premature failures are:
• Use of an inconect backfill mate1ial
• Inadequate or improper placement or compaction.
• Rocks, clods or deb1is left in the excavation or basin.
• Voids under or around the perimeter of the basin.
• Failure to prevent the migration of backfill materials.

PLACEMENT OF BASIN. The bottom of the basin excavation should be covered with suitably graded, leveled and
compacted backfill material to a depth of at least 12 inches (compacted sub-base). If a concrete hold-down/anti-floatation
pad is required, this bedding can be reduced to a depth of at least 6 inches. The basin should then be carefully lowered
into the excavation and centered on the compacted backfill or concrete pad (see attached illustration).

WARNING! Placement of a basin on a concrete pad or compacted sub-base smaller than the total basin bottom area or on
intermediate supports (saddles) will cause m1even distiibution ofloads. This may contribute to stmcture failure and is
never permitted.

BACKFILL MATERIAL. Backfill mate1ial should be clean, well granulated, free flowing, non conosive and ine1t. It
should be free of ice, snow, debris, rock, or organic material, all of which could damage the tank and inte1fere with the
compaction of the backfill material. The largest pa1ticles should not be larger than¾ inch. Not more than 3 percent (by
weight) should pass through a #8 sieve, and the backfill material should confo1m to ASTM C-33 , Paragraph 9.1
requirements. Approved backfill materials include:
• Pea Gravel, naturally rounded pa1ticles with a minimum diameter of 1/8 inch and a maximum diameter of¾
inch.
• Cmshed Rock, washed and free-flowing angular pruticles between 1/8 inch and ½ inch in size.

PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION OF BACKFILL. Compaction of backfill mate1ials should be adequate to ensure
the support of the tank and to prevent movement or settlement. Backfill materials should be placed in 12 inch lifts and
compacted to a minimum soil modulus of700 pounds per squru·e foot (pst).

SUPPORTING PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES. Suppo1t for piping, equipment and other accessories
must be provided dming backfilling. Using the basin to suppo1t piping, equipment, cribbing, bracing or blocking is never
pe1mitted. During backfilling, temporruy suppo1ting materials must be cru·efully installed and removed to prevent damage
to the basin, piping or equipment.

WARNING! Using the basin to support any loading cruried or created by piping, equipment, cribbing, bracing or
blocking is never pe1mitted.

ANCHORAGE
GENERAL. When basin installations are located in areas subject to high water tables or flooding, provision should be
made to prevent the basins, either empty or filled, from floating.
P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindusti1es.com

ANCHORAGE, continued
The buoyancy force to be offset is detemrined primarily by the volume of the basin. The principle offsetting factors
include:
• Backfill mate1ials.
• Concrete hold-down pad.
• Friction between the tank, backfill mate1ials and the smrnunding soil.

METHODS OF ANCHORING. All methods of anchoring basins use the weight of the backfill materials to offset the
buoyancy forces. The use of supplemental mechanical anchoring methods (a concrete hold-down pad) increases the
amount of backfill ballast which is mechanically attached to the basin. The recommended method of attachment is to pour
concrete grout over the basin's anti-floatation flange and concrete hold-down pad (see attached illustration).

ANCHORAGE REQUIREMENTS. Requirements for anchorage, thickness of concrete hold-down pads, as well as the
size of anchors and reinforcement must be calculated for each installation based on the environmental conditions of that
specific installation.

WARNING! Use "submerged" material weights when calculating anchorage requirements.


Example: weight of concrete (150 pounds per cubic foot) minus the weight of the water (62.4
pounds per cubic foot) equals a "submerged" weight of 87.6 pounds per cubic foot.
am
P.O. Box 420 ♦ 420 N State Rd 25 ♦ Rochester, IN 46975
Toll Free (800) 354-4534 ♦ (574) 223-3681 ♦ Fax (574) 223-6106
E-mail: [email protected] ♦ Website: www.toppindustries.com

FIB ERG LASS BASIN


INSTALLATION REFERENCE GUIDE

.,__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ UFTINd dABLE OR CHAIN

rt:::.======:::::::I>,--------- ,,PREADER BAR

CAUTION:
,iipPE AND i;IIZE OP EJ(OAVATION
A,11 PER O$HA AND ENdlNEE;R'i;I
IIPEdlFld ATION. IN THE AB$ENd E
OP TH~E. doNSIDER OONDITTON
OF $OIL, DllPTH OP EXdAVATION
AND f/Af'llTY dON$1DERATIONl'I,
~trm.EANTI-PLOATATION

FIBERd!ASS BAIIIN
All REQUIRED PER
ENQINEER'jl
i;IPEdlFldATION

BAd l<nLI. MATERIAL


CONCRETE dROUT AS
R~~Vi:~D,SER
~PECIFl~TION

NOTE:
The Intent or l helle lnlllallaUon ln1lrucUon" and lllu,.tratlon•
I• lo enllure that damaee or premature failu re lo the ba11ln
will not occur. These ln•lallaUon lnalrucUon• and lllu,itraUon,i
are NOT Intended lo preclude normal •.rely procedure • which
•hould be followe d to prevent Injury to p el'lllonnel. j:/AFE
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES S HALL BE ENTIRELY THE
PEA GRAVEL d RU$HBD ROdK RESPONj:IIBILITY OF THE INj:ITALLER.
BAdKflY. 14,\TERJAL REOUJREMENTfl

~ USTRIES

OPP
INC◊RP◊RA TED
EMCD
WHEATON RETAIL
A0716
Composite Manholes

Tank Sump

Tank Sump
Wedding Cake

Tank Gauging
Equipment

Lightweight • Durable • Composite


EMCD
WHEATON RETAIL
A0716
Composite Manholes

The Emco Wheaton A07 I 6 Composite Manhole is


designed with lightweight, slip-resistant composite
manhole covers, using the latest manufacturing
technology to ensure porosity-free molding, and
compact, homogeneous distribution of reinforcing
fiber. The covers also utilize a UV resistant treat-
ment to protect against sun and weather damage.

Emco composite lids have a 36 month warranty.


The ManholeTrak Warranty Tracking System is
available on our website, www.emcoretail.com.

• Meets AASHTO H20 Wheel Loading


• Non-skid surface
• Powder coated cast steel cam with o-ring
• Stainless steel cam-lock fittings etched to
show open and close directional arrows;
field replaceable
• Stainless steel pry bar cleat
• Galvanized steel skirt ( 18")
L1
39", 42" & 44" Models
• Domed top construction to shed water
• Two stainless steel dual handles -
spring-loaded and key-Ii~
• Hot rolled steel skirt
• Concrete anchors
Serial Number
• 4 3/4" ID tags available

4 3/4" ID Tags
573180 Yellow,ULSD
573181 Red, Ultra
573182 White, Regular A0081-004CL S69427
Cam-Lock Wrench Euro Lift Handle

u C} +
EMCD
WHEATON RETAIL
A0716
Composite Manholes

Lid Overall Clea.r Skirt Overall


Sea.I Options Model Number Style Dia.A Dia. B Hole ID C IDD Ht. E

Lay-In A0716-018 18" Lay-in 17.0" 17.8" 16.0" 17.0" 12.0"


A0716-018L 18" Lid Only Lay-in 17.0"
A0716-020 20" Lay-in 20.0" 20.75" 17.0" 17.S" 9.75"

y~
N o Seal
A07 I 6-020LID
* A 07 16-039
A07 I 6-039LID
* A 07 16-042
A07 I 6-042LID
A0716-044
20" Lid Only Lay-in
39" Lay-in
39" Lid Only Lay-in
42" Lay-in
42" Lid Only Lay-in
44" Lay-in
20.0"
39.S"
39.S"
43.8"
43.8"
44.3"
40.4"

44.6"

45.1 "
37.8"

42.0"

42.S"
38.3"

42.S"

43.1 "
10.0"

10.0"

10.0"
A07 I 6-044LID 44" Lid Only Lay-in 44.3"

A0716-039B 39" Bolt-down 39.S" 40.4" 35.S" 38.3" 10.0"


A07 I 6-039BL 39" Lid Only Bolt-down 39.S"
A0716-042B 42" Bolt-down 43.8" 44.6" 38.5'' 42.S" 10.0"
B~
A07 I 6-042BL 42" Lid Only Bolt-down 43.8"
A0716-044B 44" Bolt-down 44.3" 45.1 " 40.3" 43.1 " 10.0"
A07 I 6-044BL 44" Lid Only Bolt-down 44.3"
Ribbed Seal, Water-resistant

Cam-Lock A0716-018C 18" Cam Lock 17.0" 17.7" IS.I " 17.0" 12.0"
A07 I 6-0 I 8CW 18" Cam Lock White Lid 17.0" 17.7" IS.I " 17.0" 12.0"
A07 I 6-0 I 8CL 18" Lid Only Cam Lock 17.0"
A07 I 6-0 I 8CWL 18" Lid Only White Cam Lock 17.0"
A0716-039C 39" Cam Lock 39.S" 40.4" 36.8" 38.3" 10.0"
A07 I 6-039CL 39" Lid Only Cam Lock 39.S"
A0716-042C 42" Cam Lock 43.8" 44.6" 41.0" 42.S" 10.0"
A07 I 6-042CL 42" Lid Only Cam Lock 43.8"
Ribbed Seal, Water-resistant
* A 07 16-044C 44" Cam Lock 44.3" 45.1 " 41.S" 43.1 " 10.0"
A07 I 6-044CL 44" Lid Only Cam Lock 44.3"

Cam-Lock-D A07 I 6-024CD 24" Cam Lock w/ D-Seal 24.0" 29.S" 22.0" 25.4" 12.0"
A07 I 6-039CD 39" Cam Lock w/ D-Seal 39.S" 40.4" 36.8" 38.3" 10.0"
A07 I 6-042CD 42" Cam Lock w/ D-Seal 43.8" 44.6" 41.0" 42.S" 10.0"
A07 I 6-044CD 44" Cam Lock w/ D-Seal 44.3" 45.1 " 41.S" 43.1 " 10.0"

i...cF------Max. Dia. B ------,~


*Most common variant
D-Seal, Water-tight i...c1------Lid Dia. A-----+1
Custom skirt heights available upon request

r- Clear Hole Dia. C

Replacement Parts - - - - Skirt Inside Dia. D ----<i,~I


570897 Rib Seal, -01 8C
495 157 Rib Seal, -039B, -039C
494988 Rib Seal, -042B, -042C, -044B, -044C
495561 D-Seal, -039CD
495562 D-Seal, -042CD, -044CD
49478 1K Cam-Lock Assembly;
-039C, -042C, -044C
49478 1LK Cam-Lock-D Assembly;
-039CD, -042CD, -044CD
5.Valves and Fittings

Submittal Package

Manufacturer:

Phone: 909-673-9945

Job: BY DESI

B
Al PUMP SO

Pumps By Design Inc.


2045 S. Baker Ave. Ontario CA 91761 pumpsbydesign .com
Ilull l _____ _ rR_u
_E_u
__(REGULAR
N_,o
_N_sASTYLE)
_L_L....."'_~_LVi_:e_s_ _ _ _..,,]~

Features - PVC, CPVC


This versatile, quarter-tum shutoff valve is well suited
for industrial and chemical processing applications.
Available in IPS Sizes 1/2"- 4" with socket, threaded or
flanged end connectors. 6" Venturied valve (4" valve with
4 x 6 adapter) available with either socket or flanged end
connection. Also available with metiic 20mm - 110mm
or 1/2" - 4" BSP threaded end connectors.

• Chemical & Corrosion Resistant PVC or CPVC


Construction
• Schedule 80 Full-Bore Design
• Strong, Buttress Thread Union Nuts
• Fully Serviceable, Replaceable Components
Sample Engineering Specification • Spears® Safe-T-Blocked® Seal Carrier
All thermoplastic ball valves shall be Trne Union type • Self Adjusting PTFE Floating Seat Design
constructed from PVC 'fype I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification • EPDM or FKM 0 -rings
12454 or CPVC 'fype IV, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification • High Impact Polypropylene Handle
23447. All O-rings shall be EPDM or FKM. All valves shall
• Spears® Safe-T-Shear® Stem Design
have Safe-T-Shear® stem and double stop Polypropylene
handle. All valve union nuts shall have Buttress threads. All seal • Sizes 1/2" - 2" Pressure Rated to 235 psi @ 73°F,
caniers shall be Safe-T-Blocked®. All valve components shall Sizes 2-1/2" - 6" and all flanged Pressure Rated to
150 psi @ 73°F
be replaceable. All EPDM valves shall be ceitified by NSF@
International for use in potable water service. All 1/2" - 2" • EPDM valves NSF® Certified for Potable Water use
valves shall be pressure rated at 235 psi and all 2-1/2" - 6" and • Suitable for Vacuum Service
all flanged valves shall be pressure rated at 150 psi for water • Assembled with Silicone-Free, Water Soluble
at 73°F, as manufactured by Speru-s® Manufacturing Company. Lubricants
• Manufactured to ASTM F 1970
Quick-View Valve Selection Chart
Valve 0 -ring PVC Part Number1 Pressure Optional Accessories*
Size Material Threaded Socket Flanged Rating

EPDM 2329-005 included 2323-005 • Round Safety Handle


1/2
FKM 2339-005 included 2333-005 • Stem Extension Kit
EPDM 2329-007 included 2323-007 235psi
3/4 Noo-Shock
FKM 2339-007 included 2333-007 Water
• 2" Square / T-Style
EPDM 2329-010 included 2323-010 @73°F Operator Nut
1
FKM 2339-010 included 2333-010
• See "BALL VALVE ACCESSORIES" section for details
EPDM 2329-012 included 2323-012 (Flanged
1-1/4 150 psi of individual products.
FKM 2339-012 included 2333-012 Non-Shock)
EPDM 2329-015 included 2323-015 Water
1-1/2 @73°F
FKM 2339-015 included 2333-015
EPDM 2329-020 included 2323-020
2
FKM 2339-020 included 2333-020
EPDM 2321 -025 2322-025 2323-025
2-1/2
FKM 2331-025 2332-025 2333-025
EPDM 2321 -030 2322-030 2323-030 150 psi
3
FKM 2331-030 2332-030 2333-030 Noo-Shock
EPDM 2321 -040 2322-040 2323-040 Water
4 @73°F
FKM 2331-040 2332-040 2333-040
62 EPDM - 2322-060 2323-060
vemiried FKM - 2332-060 2333-060
1: For CPVC valves, add the letter ·c· to part numbers listed (e.g ., 2339-00SC).
2: Consists of 4" True Union Ball Valve with two 4• x 6" Adapters.

24
(_
_
_ _ _ _ri_R_u_E ....
u(REGULAR
__
N,iiiiii
o iiiii
Nlliili
s __ Ai,,i,i
LLiiiii,'...
STYLE)
-"~_L_
v E_s_ _ _ ___,]
~
IlulI
,_ _ _ _ _ _ E - -- --1
Replacement Parts
No. Component Qty. Material

1 Handle 1 PP
2 Stem 1 PVC/CPVC
3 Stem O-ring 1 EPDM/FKM

l
A
4
5
6
7
8
Stem Bearing•
Union Nut
Seat""
Ball
Body
1
2
2
1
1
PP
PVC/CPVC
PTFE
PVC/CPVC
PVC/CPVC

j 9
10
CarrierO-ring
Seal Carrier
1
1
EPDM/FKM
PVC/CPVC
11 End Connector 2 PVC/CPVC
12 End Connector O-ring 2 EPDM/FKM
i - - - - - - - - ---+- C - - - - - - - + -1 11
Sizes 1-1/4• and larger.
_. Seat 0-ring (not shown) on sizes 2- 112" and larger.
, - - - - - - -G - - - ---,

Dimensions, Weights, Operating Torque & Cv Values


Dimension Ref erence inch es,± 1116) Annrox. Wt. (Lbs.} Oper.2
Nominal Cv4 Values
PVC CPVCTo rque
Size A 01 C D E F G
Soc/Thd Flanged Soc/Thd Flanged (in .-lb.) Soc/Thd Flanged
1/2 2-9116 3-7116 5-3/16 2-13132 2-23/32 3-112 3-15132 1.05 1.23 .95 1.14 20 25 18
314 3-1132 4-1116 6-3/16 2-518 3-3116 3-718 4 1.44 1.64 1.50 1.73 30 51 36
1 3-13132 4-5/16 6-9116 2-13116 3-23/32 4-114 4-5/16 1.91 2.22 2.08 2.43 40 97 67
1-114 3-11116 4-1/2 7-1116 2-31132 4-118 4-518 4-19132 2.38 2.78 2.52 2.91 60 204 142
1-1/2 4-318 5-5/16 8-1132 3-9132 4-15/32 5 5-9132 3.63 4.00 3.82 4 .26 80 285 201
2 5-3/16 5-13116 8-13116 4-13132 5-114 6 5-23132 5.40 6.14 5.70 6.54 90 540 381
2-1/2 7-7116 8-318 11-718 4-29132 9-718 7 7-3/16 12.87 14.26 13.44 15.85 300 712 512
3 7-7116 8-3/16 11-15/16 4-29132 9-718 7-112 7-11132 13.24 15.67 13.85 16.96 300 1294 925
4 8-15116 8-11116 13-3116 5-19132 10-13116 9-1116 8-5/32 19.58 24.32 20.49 25.83 400 2629 1868
6 Socket' 8-15116 19-518 26-1116 6-314 10-13116 11-114 14-11116 22.66 30.98 26.11 34.78 400 NIA NIA
6 Flanged3 11-3116 29-318 NIA 6-314 10-13116 11-114 14-11116 NIA NIA NIA NIA 400 NIA NIA
1: ValVe Lay Lengths.
2: Torque required at valve maximum internal pressure rating, 5 ft /sec. flow velocity.
3: Consists of 4" True Union Ball Valve with two 4" x 6" Adapters.
4: Gallons per minute at 1 psi pressure drop. Values calculated from valVe laying length, based on derivative of Hazen-Williams equation with surface roughness factor of C=150.
Cy Valves for 6" venturied flange and socket valves are not available.

Temperature Pressure Rating


System Operating 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 2 00 210
Temperature °F ( 0 C) (38) (43) (49) (54) (60) (66) (71) (77) (82) (88) (93) (99)
235 211 150 75 50 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
PVC (.34)
Valve (1.62) (1.45} (1.03} (.52) (-0-l (-0-l 1-0-l (-0-l (-0-l (-0-l 1-0-l
112" - 2"
Pressure 235 219 170 145 130 110 90 80 70 60 50 -0-
CPVC (.90) (.34)
(1.62) (1.51} (1.17} (1 .00} 1.76) (.62) (.55) (.48) (.41) 1-0-l
Rating
150 135 110 75 50 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
psi PVC (1.03) 1.93) 1.76) 1.52) 1.34) 1-0-l 1-0-l 1-0-l 1-0-l 1-0-l 1-0-l 1-0-l
(MPa) 2-112" - 6"
150 140 130 120 11 0 100 90 80 70 60 50 -0-
CPVC
11.03) 1.97) 1.90\ 1.83) 1.76) 1.70\ 1.62) 1.55) 1.48) 1.41) 1.34) 1-0-l
NOTE Flanged ValVes have a base pressure rafing of 150 psi.

NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION OF COMPRESSED AIR OR GASES


25
l•~~,1(~____ u_ti_lit_y_s_w_i_n_
g _&_s_p_r_in_g_c_ h
_e_c_k_v_a_1v_e_s_ _ _..,,,,,,)

Features • PVC White & PVC Clear


Spears® Utility Swing Check and spring assisted Utility
Spring Check Valves offer a compact, high perfomlllllce
check valve for Landscape & Itrigation, Pool & Spa,
Aquacultlll'e, OEM and many general purpose applications.
These maintenance free sealed units feature long-life EPDM
elastomer seats with weighted disc for full-flow with minimal
restriction and positive shutoff. Sp1ing assisted "Sp1ing
Check" model incorporates a positive-pressure sp1ing to
assist in valve closing without slamming. Produced from
PVC White or PVC Clear mate1ial with Socket, Threaded
or SR Threaded end connectors. Available in JPS Sizes 1/2"
through 8" for Swing Check Valves and 1/2" through 4" for
Sample Engineering Specification Spring Check Valves.

All the1moplastic check valves Shall be Utility Swing Check • Chemical & Corrosion Resistant PVC White or High
or Utility Spring Check type constmcted fonn PVC Type I, Visibility PVC Clear Construction
ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 12454. All valves shall • No Metal Parts on Swing Check - Stainless Steel
be maintenance free seal unit constmction with EPDM Spring on Spring Check
seat and weighted disc. All Spring Check Valves shall have
• Maintenance Free Sealed Unit in a Compact Space
stainless steel spring assisted operation. All valves shall Saving Design
have external flow an-ow direction designation. All valves
• Engineered for Maximum Flow, Quick Response &
shall be certified by NSF Intemational for use in potable
Positive Shutoff
water service. All valves shall be pressure rated to 150 psi
for water @ 73°F in full flow (open) position and to 75 psi • Long-Life, High Grade EPDM Seat with Weighted Disc
@ 73°F back pressure (closed), as manufactured by Spears® • Spring Assisted Spring Check Model Option for
Manufacturing Company. Positive Closing
• Sizes 1/2" - 8" Pressure Rated to 150 psi@ 73°F
Full-Flow (open) and 75 psi @ 73°F Back Pressure
(closed)
• Suitable for either Horizontal or Vertical Up-flow
Installations and Vacuum Service
• NSF@ Certified for Potable Water Use
• Silicone-Free Assembly

Quick-View Utility Swing Check Quick-View Utility Spring Check


Valve Selection Chart Valve Selection Chart
Valve Seat PVC Material1 Pressure Valve Seat PVC Material1 Pressure
Size Material Socket Threaded SR Threaded Rating Size Material Socket Threaded SR Threaded Rating
112 EPDM S1520-05 S1520-05F S1520-05FSR 1/2 EPDM S1580-05 S1580-05F S1580-05FSR
3/4 EPDM S1520-07 S1520-07F S1520-07FSR 3/4 EPDM S1580-07 S1580-07F S1580-07FSR 150 psi
EPDM S1520-10 150 psi @73°F
1 S1520-10F S1520-10FSR 1 EPDM S1580-10 S1580-10F S1580-10FSR
@73°F Full Flow
1-1/4 EPDM S1520-12 S1520-12F S1520-12FSR 1-1/4 EPDM S1580-12 S1580-12F S1580-12FSR (Open)
Full Flow
1-112 EPDM S1520-15 S1520-15F S1520-15FSR (Open) 1-112 EPDM S1580-15 S1580-15F S1580-15FSR
2 EPDM S1520-20 S1520-20F S1520-20FSR 2 EPDM S1580-20 S1580-20F S1580-20FSR 75psi
75 psi Back
2-112 EPDM S1520-25 S1520-25F S1520-25FSR 2-112 EPDM S1580-25 S1580-25F S1580-25FSR Pressure
EPDM S1520-30
Back
3 S1520-30F S1520-30FSR 3 EPDM S1580-30 S1580-30F S1580-30FSR (Closed)
Pressure
4 EPDM S1520-40 S1520-40F S1520-40FSR (Closed) 4 EPDM S1580-40 S1580-40F S1580-40FSR
6 EPDM S1520-60 S1520-60F S1520-60FSR 1: For PVC Clear Spong Check, replace dash (-) separatorw,th the letter -C" m the
part number (e g . S1580C05), (e.g . S1580C05F) or (e .g . S1580C05FSR)
8 EPDM S1520-80 N/A NIA
.. '
1. For PVC Clear Swing Check, replace dash (-) separator with the letter C m the
part number (e g . S1520C05), (e g. S1520C05F) or (e.g . S1520C05FSR)

NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION OF COMPRESSED AIR OR GAS


1127 Progressive Products from Spears• Innovation and Technology Spears®Manufacturing Company
(~_ _ _ _u_ti_lit_y_s_w
_i_n_
g _&_s_ p_r_in_g_c_h
_e_c_k_v_a_1v_e_s_ _ _.....,,) Ilull
Utility Swing Check Valve

- - 8--

Utility Spring Check Valve


----C - - - -- 1

FLOW
..
- - - - - C _ _ _ __ ,

Dimensions
Dimension Reference (inches, ± 1/16)
Nominal
B D
Size A C
Socket Threaded/SR Threaded Swing Spring
1/2 1-3/8 2-19/32 2-5/8 4-3/32 2-1/8 2-5/8
3/4 1-3/8 2-5/32 2-1/16 4-1/16 2-1/8 2-5/8
1 1-11/16 2-5/16 2-15/16 4-9/16 2-5/8 2-5/8
1-1/4 2-1/16 2-15/16 :½/8 5-1/2 3-3/8 3-3/8
1-1/2 2-7/16 3 3-11/16 5-5/8 3-3/8 3-3/8
2 3 3-5/8 4-3/8 6-3/8 4-1/4 4-1/4
2-1/2 3-9/16 4-3/8 5-1 /4 7-7/8 5-1 /8 5-1/8
3 4-5/16 4-11/16 5-5/8 8-7/16 5-3/4 5-3/4
4 5-1 /4 6 7-1/16 10-1/16 6-3/8 6-3/8
6 7-11/16 8-1/2 11-5/16 14-9/16 9-1/4 N/A
8 9-7/16 11-3/16 N/A 19-1/4 11-15/16 N/A

General Installation Information: Utility Swing check valves are designed for horizontal installations,
but may be installed in up-flow only vertical position. Check valves MUST be installed with the valves
FLOW arrow pointing in the direction of the fl ow. Do not install valve upside down. Flow velocity should
not exceed 5ft./sec. Minimum opening pressure less than 0.5 psi.

Temperature Pressure Rating


System Opera tin g 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 2 10
Te mperature °F (°C) (38) (4 3) (49) (5 4 ) (60) (66) (71) (77) (82) (88) (93) (99)
Valve 150 135 110 75 50 -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-
Pressure (1.03) (.93) (.76) (.52) (.34) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-) (-0-)
1/2" - 8" PVC
Rat ing psi 150 140 130 120 -110- -100- -90- -80- -70- -60- -50- -0-
(MPa) (1.03) (.97) (.90) (.83) (.76) ( .70) ( .62) ( .55) (.48) (.41) (.34) (-0-)

NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION OF COMPRESSED AIR OR GAS


Made in the U.S.A. Progressive Products from Spears• Innovation and Technology 1128
6. Tank Accessories and Supports

Submittal Package

Manufacturer:

Phone: 909-673-9945

Job: BY DESI

B
Al PUMP SO

Pumps By Design Inc.


2045 S. Baker Ave. Ontario CA 91761 pumpsbydesign .com
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE NITRILE
PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTOR

PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS


What It Is

PSX: Direct Drive Nitrile is a high-performance


flexible pipe-to-manhole connector that offers
easy installation and long-term performance in
one convenient product.

With the added ability to resist common


underground contaminants including
hydrocarbons and many mixed chemistries.

Whether you core or cast your holes, PSX:


Direct Drive Nitrile fits right into your production
methods, ready to seal your toughest
applications every time.

How It Works

• The connector fits into a cast or cored hole.


• A power sleeve made from tempered
series 304 stainless steel expands with a
certified installation wrench.
• Take-up clamps made from series 304
stainless steel with quick adjusting screws
secure the connector to the pipe.

Why It’s Better Where To Use

• Nitrile rubber resists most chemicals and • Manholes


hydrocarbons found in effluent and soils. • Wet wells
• Safely install from outside of the manhole • Square pump and lift stations
preventing falls from crawling down into • Stormwater structures
structures. • On-site treatment structures
• All stainless-steel components with no • Junction chambers
welds or rivets creating a stronger product. • Grease interceptors
• Precision molding provides accurate • Vaults
compensation for hole size variations.
• Contains chemically resistant stainless
steel.
• Contractor can save time and money by
backfilling immediately.

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2022.

21
Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com
Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 02.09.22.8.50
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE NITRILE
SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATIONS
PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS

Pipe-to-Manhole and Structure Connector Specification for Sanitary and Storm Sewer Applications:

All pipe-to-manhole and structure connections shall meet and or exceed ASTM C 923, Standard
Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manholes, Structures, Pipes and
laterals.

All mechanical devices, including castings, bolt assemblies, adjusters shall use non-magnetic 300
series stainless steel with no welds or rivets in its assemblies.

The installation of the connector shall be accomplished at one time and shall require no additional
adjustments or installation at a later time to insure a watertight seal.

Take up clamps shall use non-magnetic 304 series stainless steel and be installed in the field using a
T-Handle Torque wrench set to 60 inch-pounds and installation shall follow manufacturer’s instructions.

The connector shall be PSX: Direct Drive Nitrile and PSX: Nylo Drive Nitrile as manufactured by Press-
Seal Corporation of Fort Wayne, IN or approved equal.

Product Performance
PSX: Direct Drive - Nitrile meets or exceeds all requirements of the following specifications and/or test
methods:

• ASTM C 923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Structures, Pipes, and Laterals
• ASTM C 1619 Class D (Material Spec)
• ASTM C 1244 - Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure
(Vacuum) Test
• ASTM C 1478 - Standard Specification for Storm Drain Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced
Concrete Storm Sewer Structures, Pipes and Laterals
• ASTM F 2510 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures and Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Drainage Pipes

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2022.

22 Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com


Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 02.09.22.8.50
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE NITRILE
SELECTION GUIDE

PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS


MINIMUM
HOLE SIZE PIPE O.D. TAKE-UP MINIMUM
PSX: DD NITRILE GASKET I.D. SPAN/RISE
RANGE ACCOMMODATION CLAMP SIZE ROUND
SIZE and STRAIGHT
RANGE STRUCTURE
DESCRIPTION WALL
INCH mm INCHES (mm) INCH mm QTY PART # (INCHES/mm)
(INCHES/mm)
REQUIRES BLACK SHORT 7/16” TORQUE WRENCH PRESET TO 12 FT/LBS PART # 850.605

8 QRS STEP “S” NITRILE 1.70” TO 2.50” 43 - 64 mm 2.20 56 mm 1 600-088


8 QRS STEP “R” NITRILE 203- 208 2.75” TO 3.75” 70 - 95 mm 3.50 89 mm 1 600-088
8.00 - 8.20 36 (900 mm) 16 (400 mm))
8 QRS STEP “Q” NITRILE mm 3.75” TO 4.80” 95 - 122 mm 4.60 117 mm 1 600-088
PSX: DD 8 QRS NITRILE 1.70” TO 4.80” 43 - 122 mm N/A N/A 1 600-088

12Y PSX: DD NITRILE 305 - 310 5.70” TO 6.90” 145 - 175 mm 6.50 165 mm 1 600-128
12.00- 12.20 36 (900 mm) 20 (500 mm)
12 M PSX: DD NITRILE mm 8.00” TO 9.10” 203 - 231 mm 8.63 219 mm 1 600-152

356 - 361
14 M PSX: DD NITRILE 14.00 - 14.20 9.75” TO 11.10” 248 - 282 mm 10.35 263 mm 1 600-188 36 (900 mm) 22 (550 mm)
mm

REQUIRES BLUE 1/2” TORQUE WRENCH PRESET TO 20 FT/LBS PART # 850.610

406 - 411 11.36” TO


16L PSX: Direct Drive 16.00-16.20 289 - 318 mm 12.10 307 mm 1 600.232 36 (900 mm) 24 (600 mm)
mm 12.50

406- 411 12.05” TO


16 M PSX: DD NITRILE 16.00 - 16.20 306 - 338 mm 12.75 324 mm 1 600-232 36 (900 mm) 24 (600 mm)
mm 13.30”

457 - 462 14.60” TO


18 M PSX: DD-2 NITRILE 18.00 - 18.20 371 - 394 mm 15.35 390 mm 2 600-296 36 (900 mm) 26 (650 mm)
mm 15.50”

559 - 564 18.00” TO


22 M PSX: DD-2 NITRILE 22.00 - 22.20 457 - 488 mm 18.70 475 mm 2 600-376 42 (1067 mm) 30 (762 mm)
mm 19.20”

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2022.

23
Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com
Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 02.09.22.8.50
PSX: DIRECT DRIVE
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

PIPE TO MANHOLE & TANK CONNECTORS


1. Prepare the hole to receive the gasket.
a. Clean the hole of any debris or loose dirt.
ITEMS NEEDED
b. Examine the hole for any imperfections
(bug holes) and wire ends in the gasket bearing
surface. t-handle torque wrench

c. Patch any voids (bug holes) with patch


compound.
d. Remove any wire protruding up into the
hole and patch with slurry if needed.

2. Select the correct PSX: Direct Drive wrench.


The wrenches and the adjusters are sized so
that only the correct wrench can be used with
each size adjuster, and will provide the correct
torque. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER SIZE
OR TYPE OF WRENCH TO INSTALL PSX:
DIRECT DRIVE. clamp

3. Place the PSX: Direct Drive Connector in the


hole with the adjuster mechanism in position
so that it will be at the top of the hole (10 to
12 o’clock) in the final installed position of the
manhole. Align the Connector so that it is square
to the hole.

4. Place the wrench on the adjuster nut so that the


arm of the wrench is on the installer’s left side.
This will ensure that the proper orientation is boot
maintained.

5. Begin to tighten the PSX:Direct Drive


Connector by pulling the wrench handle toward
the outside of the manhole. The wrench will
ratchet back easily at the end of the stroke. If the
Connector has multiple adjusters (28” (711 mm)
and higher), tighten each adjuster five times,
alternating them in sequence so that installation
pressure is evenly distributed.

6. Continue tightening until proper torque is hex wrench


reached. The wrench will signal this by
“breaking” slightly. If in doubt torque has been
reached, tighten again and wrench should
“break” quickly and easily. If there are multiple
adjusters, make sure that the wrench “breaks” at
each one. Installation is now complete.

TIP: To remove an installed PSX: Direct Drive Connector, simply reverse wrench position and loosen
Connector.

Press-Seal believes all information is accurate as of its publication date. Information, specifications, and prices
are all subject to change without notice. Press-Seal is not responsible for any inadvertent errors. Copyright 2020.

19
Phone: 800-348-7325 PRESS-SEAL CORPORATION Email: sales @press-seal.com
Fax: (260) 436-1908 Protecting Our Planet’s Clean Water Supply Web: www.press-seal.com
ISO 9001: Registered • Version 09.17.20.929
PIPE SEAL GRO MMET
THE PIPE SEAL GROMMET IS DESIGNED TO SEAL PIPING PENETRATI ONS TH ROUGH
FLAT AND CURVED SURFACES. THE USER SIMPLY CUTS THE REQU IRED
ENTRY HOLE, LU BRICATES THE PIPE AND SEAL, AND FORCES THE PIPE
TH ROUGH THE SEAL. THE OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE PIPE SEAL GROMMET
EXPANDS SEALING THE PIPE TO THE BASIN WALL.

N0t.11NAL ACTUAL HOLE


PART PIPE PIPE SAW
I NO. SIZE O.D. SIZE

I
I
G038 3/8 .675 1
G050 1/2 .840 1 1/4
----+----
I G075 3/4 1.050 1 1/4
G100 1 1.315 1 3/4
1
I G125 1 1/4 1.660 3
G150 1 1/2 1.900 3
I
I G200 2 2.375 3
G300 3 3.500 4
G400 4 4.500 5
G600 6 6.625 7
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
SECTION A- A

ELE CTRIC CORD SEAL GROMM ET


THE ELECTRIC CORD SEAL GROMMET IS DESIGNED TO PROVIDE
A GAS TI GHT SEAL FOR ELECTRIC CORDS PASSING THROUGH
STEEL AND FI BERGLASS BASIN COVERS. THE CORD SEAL
GROMMET IS ENGINEERED TO WORK WITH A 2 1/2" OPENING IN
THE COVER PLATE. CORD SEAL GROMMETS ARE SHI PPED
WITH ONE PRE- DRILLED HOLE AND HAS TWO INDENTS FOR
(2) OPTIONAL ADD ITIONAL CORDS.
3/8" DIA.
CORD HOLES

CUT

SECTION 8 - 8
3/8" DIA.
PRE- DRILLED
CORD HOLE
!PART NO. ECG!

INSJAI I AJIQN INSTRUCTIONS·


1. PULL ELECTRIC CORD THROUGH 2" HOLE.
2. WORK CORD THROUGH CUT IN SEAL.
3. STARTING AT ONE EDGE OF THE CUT
WORK EDGE OF 2" HOLE INTO THE LIP
OF THE CORD SEAL

Scale-: None
GEiOMIIETS Revisions

ToPP
Dra'llll By: leM
i , , - - , - - - - - - - - - - - 1_.pp•'d By, .
Dale: 07 08 03

I NCORPORATED '_ """""'-Jllcl>""n"'_:"",:5


Phooe, 000 c:
" "'.,.
I<~"-.
4 111_.
P.. ' J':='"""°"'""''--'--
O'I ......,, . . suJ:
·:e'-"
,.., p _ eraed
_To,"_Prln-'-'-'t--'
• -'-'---'--' .1~ereo.oe
07 /08/03 1 Q Q9 6 I.
FLOAT BRACKETS

1"

1
48" 11
2 16 "

1
12"
1"

5
16 "
1 8"
24"
7
8"

SSFB3-12 - STAINLESS STEEL FLOAT BRACKET W/ (3) 1/2" CORD GRIPS


(W/ BRACKET CLIP)

1"

1
42"
11
2 16 " 1
12"
1"

5
16 "
3
94"
2"
7
8"

SSFB4 - STAINLESS STEEL FLOAT BRACKET W/ (4) 1/2" CORD GRIPS


(W/ BRACKET CLIP)
CUSTOMER: PO: SO:

MR

PUMP & DISCONNECT:


MATERIAL:

PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAWN DATE


DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
TOLERANCES:
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MR 03/28/2018 FRACTIONAL -
DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF ANGULAR: MACH BEND -
<INSERT COMPANY NAME HERE> ANY CHECKED TWO PLACE DECIMAL
REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE - THREE PLACE DECIMAL SIZE DWG NO
WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
A FLOAT BRACKETS 01
14933
<INSERT COMPANY NAME HERE> IS ENG APPR REF:
304 SS
MATERIAL:
PROHIBITED
WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1
FLE XIBLE ENTRY BOOT

PART NO. DESCRIPTION HOLE SAW


FBO50 1/ 2 " BOOT FITTING 2 3/8"
FBO75 3/4 " BOOT FITTING 2 3/8 "
FB1OO 1" BOOT FITTING 2 3/8"
FB15O 1 1/2" BOOT FITTING 2 3/ 8"
FB2O0 2" BOOT FITTING 4 1/4"
F83O0 3" BOOT FITTING 4 1/4 "
F8350 3 1/2" BOOT FITTING 5 1/2"
FB4O0 4 " BOOT FITTING 5 1/2"
FB6O0 6" BOOT FITTING SABRE SAW
Boot Application For : Boot Application For :
Fl at Wall Sumps Round Wa ll Sumps
FIVE STEP INSTALLATION

ID
ID
ID
ID
ID
ID
ID

St e p #1 St ep #2 Step #3
Locate the cent er en tr y Remove t he template Insert t he en t r y
point in th e basin wall and drill t he o pening boot t hro ugh th e open ing
and drill th e stud holes hole for the Flexible and th en install the
in the side wall us ing Entry Boot using t he compression rlllg
the guide t emplat e a nd appropriate s ize h ole and fastener s .
a 5/16" drill bit . saw. (see tab le above)

~ -
~
I ~
- I f ~
D ~
- I ~ ~

I ~

- D - ~

St ep #4 Step #5
Tighten each o! the fastener s Inser t pipe or conduit
firmly with a socket wrench through t h e Flexible Ent ry
fitted with a 7 / 16" sock et. Boot. Ins tall and t igh ten
On r ound wall a pplications. band cl amp to 30 in. lbs.
tighten each n ut in st ages
so t he boot flange and
compr ession ring can even ly
conform to the r ounded surface.

PLEXIBLE ENTRY BOOT Revisi ons


PBD INC
v TYMAN PBD INC
[email protected]

Package Name 100AFE, v01 Due Date 25 Jul 2023

Revision # 1 Submittal Prepar… xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Package type For approval

Submittal # 1

Drawing Ref PBD-100

Full submittal

Physical samples provided

PBD INC Proprietary Information-Confidential

# Sub-section Item Specified Source or Mfr Item Submitted Notes

F
F
placeholder_sample_membrane_roofing_submittals.pdf

F
Sample License - Sample Project.pdf

F
Sample Permit - Sample Project.pdf

F
Testing Schedule - Sample Project.xlsx

F
Key Personnel List - Sample Project.pdf

F
Submittal.com Sample Spec Book for Sample Project (1).pdf

F
10mm-Head-Drive-Pins-ICC-ES-Evaluation-874559.pdf

F
TDS_WATERSTOP-RX_AM_EN_201608_V3.pdf

F
data_sheet-concrete expansion joint 6917-05.pdf

F
LM Cure Concentrate SDS US English.pdf

mk58ft_a.pdf

F Sample License - Sample Project.pdf

F GAFGLAS_80_Ultima_Base_Sheet_Data_sheet.pdf

# Sub-section Item Specified Source or Mfr Item Submitted Notes


Section:

#:

Specified:

Item submitted:

placeholder_sample_membrane_roofing_submittals.pdf
Sample License - Sample Project.pdf
Sample Permit - Sample Project.pdf
Key Personnel List - Sample Project.pdf
Submittal.com Sample Spec Book for Sample Project (1).pdf
TDS_WATERSTOP-RX_AM_EN_201608_V3.pdf
data_sheet-concrete expansion joint 6917-05.pdf
LM Cure Concentrate SDS US English.pdf
mk58ft_a.pdf

Provided by: PBD INC


v TYMAN

[email protected]
Section: 07 50 13 Roofing Shop Drawings, Products, O&M, Warranty
Sub-section: 1.04.B.
Item submitted: Shop Drawings

Placeholder for Shop Drawing documents


Section: 07 50 13 Roofing Shop Drawings, Products, O&M, Warranty
Sub-section: 1.04.C.
Item submitted: Samples for Verification Purposes

Placeholder for Samples for Verification Purposes


documents
Section: 07 50 13 Roofing Shop Drawings, Products, O&M, Warranty
Sub-section: 1.06.A.
Item submitted: Maintenance Data

Placeholder for Maintenance Data documents


Section: 07 50 13 Roofing Shop Drawings, Products, O&M, Warranty
Sub-section: 1.12.A.
Item submitted: Manufacturer’s “Total Roofing System” Warranty

Placeholder for Manufacturer’s “Total Roofing System”


Warranty documents
Section: 07 50 13 Roofing Shop Drawings, Products, O&M, Warranty
Sub-section: 2.04.A.
Item submitted: EPDM Membrane Roofing System

Placeholder for EPDM Membrane Roofing System


documents
Section: 07 50 13 Roofing Shop Drawings, Products, O&M, Warranty
Sub-section: 2.05.B.
Item submitted: Sheet Flashing

Placeholder for Sheet Flashing documents


Section: 07 50 13 Roofing Shop Drawings, Products, O&M, Warranty
Sub-section: 2.10.A.
Item submitted: Flexible Walkways

Placeholder for Flexible Walkways documents


This is a sample license.
This is a sample permit.
KEY PERSONNEL LIST
Submittal.com Sample Project
August 2020

Main Project Phone 510/209-4486


Barrett Support Line: 312/369-4020

Name Title Cell Email

Kyle Skrinak Project Manager (510) 708-1089 [email protected]

Kelly Rivera Project Engineer (510) 544-9380 [email protected]

Roger Altman Superintendent (510) 206-8593 [email protected]

Michelle LaTourette Vice President (312) 486-5587 [email protected]

Security Phone 24 hours (510) 335-0397


SUBMITTAL.COM SAMPLE PROJECT
For Educational Purposes Only

Contents

SECTION 01 31 00 ............................................................................................................. 2

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION .................................................................... 2

SECTION 01 45 00 ............................................................................................................. 6

QUALITY CONTROL............................................................................................................ 6

SECTION 051200 ..............................................................................................................25

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ...........................................................................................25

SECTION 075013 ..............................................................................................................32

SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING .....................................................................................32

SECTION 231123 ..............................................................................................................43

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING ........................................................................................43

SECTION 260519 ..............................................................................................................56

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .........................................56

Submittal.com Sample Project [email protected] 1


SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 MULTIPLE CONTRACTOR COORDINATION

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate all work on the project with and by the other

Separate Prime Contractors.

1. The Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate construction operations that are dependent

upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation to ensure efficient and

orderly installation of each and all parts of the work. Where installation of one part of the

work is dependent on installation of other work or components, either before or after its own

installation, the Lead Prime Contractor shall schedule construction activities in the

sequence required to obtain the best results.

2. Where availability of space is limited, the Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate the

installation of different work and components to assure maximum accessibility for required

construction or installation, and for any required maintenance, service, and repair. The

Lead Prime Contractor shall ensure adequate provisions are made to accommodate items

scheduled for later installation.

B. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall be responsible for installing or connecting certain items

that will be furnished by other Separate Prime contractors and bear a direct relationship to the

installing contractor’s work. Such items of work include, but are not limited to, through-wall

louvers and grills, flashings for floor drains, flashing for vent pipes, access panels, connections

for electric motors and devices, and work of similar nature.

C. The Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of

the work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the preparation of

schedules, the installation and removal of temporary facilities, and Project close-out activities.

D. When necessary, the Lead Prime Contractor shall schedule and chair meetings, and prepare

memoranda for distribution to each party involved, required for coordination of the work by

Separate Prime Contractors.

SECTION 013100
Submittal.com Sample Project 2
1.02 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Within 7 days after notice to proceed, each Separate Prime Contractor shall submit to the

Owner and to all other Separate Prime Contractors the Contractor's principal staff

assignments. The list should include the superintendent and all other management and

supervisory personnel in attendance at the site, and at least one primary responsible point of

contact at the Contractor’s home office. The information on the list shall include each

individual’s duties and responsibilities, their address, and their telephone number(s).

B. All Separate Prime Contractors shall coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations

are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

Salvage of all materials and equipment involved in the performance of, but not actually

incorporated in, the work shall be maximized.

C. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall supervise its own construction activities to ensure that no

part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging,

or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

D. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall, during handling and installation, clean and protect

construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Protective coverings shall be applied

where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at substantial completion.

E. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall clean and maintain completed construction as frequently

as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Operable components shall be

adjusted and lubricated to ensure operability without damaging effects.

1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings serve to coordinate the Work in an area where two or more Separate

Prime Contractors have Work, or in an area that has limited space for the installation of

various components and systems. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and

integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during

fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended, or that show

sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

B. Coordination Drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing, and shall be prepared, formatted,

SECTION 013100
Submittal.com Sample Project 3
and processed in accordance with the requirements for Shop Drawings in Specification Section 013300,
Submittal Procedures.

C. Refer to Technical Specification sections for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for

mechanical and electrical installations. Other Technical Specifications sections may also

identify requirements for Coordination Drawings.

1.04 DAILY REPORTS

A. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall submit a Daily Report for each day of the Contract

duration. A Daily Report shall be submitted for each non-work day, and it shall indicate that

no work took place.

B. Daily Reports are a submittal that shall be provided on a daily basis, not later than the close

of business of the Monday following the work week for the Daily Reports.

C. Submittal Procedures (Paragraph 1.03) and Review and Disposition of Submittals (Paragraph

1.04) are not required for Daily Reports. Daily Reports shall be submitted directly to the

Owner, with copies submitted to the Professional. The Owner will review Daily

Reports upon receipt, and will notify the Contractor only if there any problems.

D. The Daily Report shall contain, at least, the following information concerning activities at the

Project:

1. List of subcontractors at the site

2. Approximate count of personnel at the site

3. Key equipment utilized on site

19. Substantial Completions authorized

E. The Contractor may use his own forms or format for the Daily Report, but it must contain the

information listed above.

F. Daily Reports shall include information for all subcontractors working for the Prime

Contractor. The Prime Contractor has the option of requiring his subcontractors to submit

Daily Reports on their own activities, and those may be attached to the Prime Contractor's

Daily Report.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

(Not Used)

SECTION 013100
Submittal.com Sample Project 4
PART 3 – EXECUTION

(Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01 31 00

SECTION 013100
Submittal.com Sample Project 5
SECTION 01 45 00

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 QUALITY CONTROL CONCEPTS

A. Quality Control Services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports,

performed by the Contractor, independent agencies, and governing authorities during and

after the execution of the Work to evaluate that the Work complies with the Contractual

requirements. Quality Control Services do not include Contract enforcement activities

performed by the Owner or its Professional.

B. Inspection and Testing Services may be required to verify compliance with requirements

specified or indicated, and are considered to be part of Quality Control Services. Such

Inspection and Testing Services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance

with Contract requirements.

C. Specific Quality Control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the

respective Technical Specification sections for those construction activities. Those Quality

Control requirements cover production of standard products as well as customized

fabrication, installation, and construction. Requirements for Quality Control Services may

also be required by governing authorities.

D. Quality Control Services specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control

procedures to facilitate compliance with Contract requirements, and do not relieve the

Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract requirements.

E. Requirements for the Contractor to provide Quality Control Services also being conducted by

the Owner, its Professional, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions

of this Section.

1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor.

1. Separate Prime Contractors shall provide those Quality Control Services specified in the

Technical Specification sections, or required by governing authorities, related to their

SECTION 014500
Submittal.com Sample Project 6
Work, except where they are specifically indicated to be the responsibility of another

Separate Prime Contractor, or the responsibility of the Owner, its Professional, or

another entity.

2. The Contractor shall employ contracted testing laboratories, consultants, or other

qualified individuals or firms to conduct his Quality Control Services.

3. Specified Quality Control Services may include specific requirements for Inspection and

Testing Services, and if indicated to be the responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor

shall employ a testing laboratory, consultant, or other qualified individual or firm to

perform the inspection or test.

B. Re-testing.

1. The Contractor is responsible for re-inspection or re-testing where results of required

inspections, tests, or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance

with the Contract Document, regardless of whether the original inspection or test was the

Contractor's responsibility.

1.03 PROCEDURES

A. Any testing laboratory, consultant, or other qualified individual or firm engaged for Quality

Control Services shall be licensed to operate in the State of California.

B. Any testing laboratory engaged shall be prequalified as complying with Recommended

Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification by the American Council of

Independent Laboratories, and shall specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be

performed.

C. If the Contractor is required to engage an Inspection and Testing Service, and the Owner

has also employed an Inspection and Testing Service for the same or related services, the

Contractor shall not employ the same Service engaged by the Owner.

D. Where Quality Control Services are indicated as the responsibility of the Owner or its

Professional, the Owner will furnish to the Contractor the names, addresses, and

telephone numbers of those testing laboratories, consultants, or other qualified individuals or

firms to be engaged, and a description of the types of inspections and tests they will perform.

SECTION 014500
Submittal.com Sample Project 7
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and governing authorities, and any other

entities engaged by either of them, performing required inspections, tests, and similar

services, and the Contractor shall provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.

Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:

1. Providing access to the Work.

2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.

3. Providing preliminary design mix or other design data related to the inspections or tests.

4. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing, or

assisting in taking samples.

5. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivering samples to

testing laboratories.

6. Securing and protecting inspection, sampling, and test equipment at the Project site.

F. Contractors and all entities performing inspections, tests, and similar services shall

coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of

delay. Contractors, the Owner, and each entity shall coordinate activities to avoid the

necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.

The General Construction Contractor is responsible for coordinating and scheduling times for

inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities whenever those activities affect more

than one Prime Contractor.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit Qualifications Data for any Inspection and Testing Service that

the Contractor plans to engage to perform inspections, testing, and similar services.

Qualifications Data shall include proof of qualifications, in the form of a recent report on the

inspection of the Inspection and Testing Service by a recognized authority.

B. The Contractor shall submit a Schedule of Tests and Inspections, in tabular form, which

includes the following:

1. Technical Specification section number and title

2. Description of inspection and/or test

SECTION 014500
Submittal.com Sample Project 8
3. Identification of applicable standards

4. Identification of inspection and/or test methods

5. Number of inspections and tests required

6. Time schedule or time span for inspections and tests

7. Entity responsible for performing inspections and tests

8. Requirements for obtaining samples

9. Unique characteristics of each Quality Control Service

C. The Contractor shall submit, for the Owner's records, copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.05 INSPECTION AND TEST REPORTS

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner required reports of inspections, tests, and

similar services. Reports from Inspection and Testing Services shall consist of a certified

written report of each inspection, test, or similar service, and such reports shall be submitted

through the Contractor to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of any inspection or test report to the Owner.

If the inspection or test was required by a governing authority, the Contractor shall submit

additional copies of that inspection or test report directly to that governing authority.

C. Reports of each inspection or test shall include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Date of report

2. Contract number and Project title

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing entity

4. Identification of product and Technical Specification section

5. Dates and locations of samples, tests, and inspections

6. Names of individuals conducting the inspection or test

7. Designation of the test method

8. Complete inspection or test data

SECTION 014500
Submittal.com Sample Project 9
9. Test results and an interpretation of test results

10. Ambient conditions at the time of sampling and testing

11. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with

Contract requirements

12. Recommendations on re-testing

13. Name and signature of authorizing individual

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

(Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

(Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01 45 00

SECTION 014500
Submittal.com Sample Project 10
SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 072617 "Vapor Retarders"
2. Section 030150 "Concrete Patching"
3. Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of speciallyfinished
formed concrete.
4. Section 033500 “ Concrete Finishing”
5. Section 035300 "Concrete Topping" for emery- and iron-aggregate concrete floor
toppings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;
materials subject to compliance with requirements.
B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 11
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete Subcontractor.
e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.
2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,
semi-rigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring
procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation
tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, concrete repair procedures, and concrete
protection.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop
spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.
1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
E. Samples: For waterstops.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 12
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Fiber reinforcement.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing compounds.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Bonding agents.
10. Adhesives.
D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,
shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.
F. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACIcertified
Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete
Flatwork Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 13
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician,
Grade II.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.
E. Mockups: Cast concrete formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,
texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) for slab-on-grade and 100 sq. ft. (9.3
sq. m) for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
F. Steel Procurement Act: All steel products being provided for permanent inclusion in the project
are to be made in the United States in accordance with the Steel Procurement Act, and
certificates of compliance from each supplier for all steel products delivered to the project shall
be submitted as required by the Act.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction
testing on concrete mixtures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 14
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M).
2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M).
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:
a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
b. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 15
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding
specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form
ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT


A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M.
D. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M.
E. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn
steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 16
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to
length with ends square and free of burrs.
B. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M.
C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice,"
of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated
wire bar supports.
3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar
supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures
from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II, gray.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.
4. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10
years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar
aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330/C 330M, 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate
size.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 17
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
G. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or
mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.
H. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-setaccelerating,
anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
I. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl
rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete,
3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS


A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS


A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, curing paper, white opaque polyethylene film, and
polypropylene nonwoven fabric with white coating applied to one side, or white burlappolyethylene
sheet.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 18
B. Water: Potable.
C. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A, non-yellowing.
D. Dissipating Resin, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1-D, Class B,
nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor
covering.
E. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS


A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Semi-rigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1. Types I and II, nonload bearing or Types IV and V, load bearing as required by
application, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick,
with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL


A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 19
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
w/c ratio below 0.50.
4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS


A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
B. Walls and Building Frame Members: Normal-weight concrete.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 20
C. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.
3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m).
4. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
D. Suspended Slabs on Metal Deck: Lightweight concrete. Areas indicated on drawings
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 110 lb/cu. ft. (1762 kg/cu. m), plus or minus 3 lb/cu.
ft. (48.1 kg/cu. m) as determined by ASTM C 567/C 567M.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT


A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING


A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION


A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 21
1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION


A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 22
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION


A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for design, installation, and removal
of shoring and reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.


3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 23
….
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for
hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of
curing period.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 033000
Submittal.com Sample Project 24
SECTION 051200

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel.
2. Field-installed shear connectors.
3. Grout.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck.
2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to
structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other steel items not defined
as structural steel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in
AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

SECTION 051200
Submittal.com Sample Project 25
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment Drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design
loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
E. Product Test Reports: For the following:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
3. Shear stud connectors.
4. Shop primers.
5. Nonshrink grout.
F. Survey of existing conditions.
G. Source quality-control reports.
H. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification

SECTION 051200
Submittal.com Sample Project 26
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE or has a minimum 10
years documented experience on projects of similar size and complexity.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds
shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by
AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for
welding personnel qualification.
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
3. AISC 360.
4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E. Steel Procurement Act: All steel products being provided for permanent inclusion in the project
are to be made in the United States in accordance with the Steel Procurement Act, and
certificates of compliance from each supplier for all steel products delivered to the project shall
be submitted as required by the Act.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

SECTION 051200
Submittal.com Sample Project 27
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other
information and restrictions indicated.
1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.
2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored-load level.
B. Moment Connections: Type PR, partially and Type FR, fully restrained as indicated on
drawings.
C. Construction: Combined system of braced frame and shear walls.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS


A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B. Channels, Angles, Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.
F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.
G. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.
H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS


A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel
nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain
finish.
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends;

SECTION 051200
Submittal.com Sample Project 28
ASTM A 563, Grade DH, (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M, Type 10.9),
compressible-washer type with plain finish.
C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex
or round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex
carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain.
D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable as
indicated.
2.4 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.5 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged,
nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
2.8 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

SECTION 051200
Submittal.com Sample Project 29
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-inplace
concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

SECTION 051200
Submittal.com Sample Project 30
of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface
of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."

END OF SECTION

SECTION 051200
Submittal.com Sample Project 31
SECTION 075013

SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Single-ply membrane roofing system and supplementary items necessary for
installation.
1.2 UNIT PRICES
A. Concrete Moisture Barrier Unit Price: Include unit price to provide Concrete Moisture Barrier
Treatment at concrete roof deck.
1. If Concrete Moisture Barrier Treatment is provided, delete Vapor Retarder sheet from
roofing assembly.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
B. Roof Edge Regions: The following definitions from ANSI/SPRI ES-1 shall be applicable to this
project:
1. Roof Corner Region: Based on the following:
a. For buildings with mean roof height greater than 60 ft , the corner region is a
distance from the building corner that is 10 percent of the minimum building width
but not less than 3 ft .
2. Roof Perimeter: The section of the roof edge between corner regions as defined above.
The edge condition includes the roof edge device (edge flashing or coping) and the
nailers or other substrate to edge device is attached.
C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details,
installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 32
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations,
sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and
field-assembled work.
1. Show base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Show flat and sloped tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Show crickets and saddles, including slopes.
4. Show roof plan showing orientation of membrane roofing and fastener spacing.
5. Show insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
6. Show cold-applied adhesive pattern for insulation installation; typical pattern of a 100
square foot area.
C. Samples for Verification Purposes: For the following products:
1. Roofing membrane, 12 in by 12 in square, of color specified, including side and end lap
seam.
2. Flashing sheets.
3. Vapor retarder, 12 in by 12 in square.
4. Roof insulation.
5. Walkway pads.
6. Termination bars.
7. Fasteners of each type, length, and finish.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS


A. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
B. Field Quality Control Reports: Written report of testing and inspection required by "Field Quality
Control".
C. Concrete Roof Deck - Moisture Content Measurement: If requested by Owner or Architect,
submit recorded readings.
D. Substrate Surface Temperature Readings at Cold Fluid-Applied Insulation Adhesive: If
requested by Owner or Architect, submit recorded readings.
E. Manufacturer's Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its
product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details,
and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that a warranty will be issued.

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 33
F. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities
and experience. Include list of completed projects.
G. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
1. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating
obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experience: Installer's personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in the
successful performance of Work similar to scope of this Project.
2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor at Project while the Work is
in progress, and who has not less than 5 years of experience installing products and
systems similar to scope of this Project.
B. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparing and submitting roof installation acceptance
certification as necessary in connection with fire and extended-coverage insurance on roofing
and associated work.
C. Quality Standards:
1. Unless otherwise recommended by roofing manufacturer, provide roofing system in
accordance with recommendations of the NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for
roofing type indicated.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing system materials with the
fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test
method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A, for application and roof slopes
indicated.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE


A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 34
with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
1. Participants:
a. Architect.
b. Construction Manager
c. General Contractor, including superintendent.
d. Installer, including project manager and supervisor (superintendent).
e. If requested, Manufacturer's qualified technical representative.
f. Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.
2. Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by
describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work.
Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 35
provide a successful installation without failure.

1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's written "Total Roofing System" warranty
signed by an authorized representative using manufacturer's standard form, without monetary
limitation (NDL), agreeing to repair or replace components of roofing system which exhibit
defects in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. "Defects" is defined to
include, but not limited to, deterioration or failure to perform as required.
1. Warranty includes roofing, flashings, adhesives, sealants, insulation, fastener systems,
cover board, substrate board, and other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty includes roof edge flashings integral with roofing system as specified in Division
07 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal".
3. Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall warrant the products to be free from material and
labor Defects for a period of 30 years from date of Substantial Completion
B. Installer's Warranty: Furnish installer's written warranty signed by an authorized representative
using installer's standard form agreeing to repair or replace components of roofing system
which exhibit defects in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. "Defects" is
defined to include, but not limited to, deterioration or failure to perform as required.
1. Warranty includes roofing, flashings, counterflashings, adhesives, sealants, insulation,
fastener systems, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and other
components of roofing system.
2. Warranty includes roof edge flashings integral with roofing system as specified in Division
07 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal".
3. Warranty Period: Installer shall warrant the installation to be free from workmanship
Defects for a period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS


A. Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract
Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed.

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 36
B. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems
specified to establish a standard of quality. Other available manufacturers offering products
having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply
with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and base flashings shall withstand specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing system
and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B. Design Loads: Installed roofing system and base flashings shall withstand design loads
including, but not limited to, requirements established by authorities having jurisdiction,
applicable local building codes, and as indicated. Contractor shall obtain required design data
and identify requirements accommodated on submittal drawings.
C. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing system materials that are compatible with one another
under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing system
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
D. Edge Systems Design: Provide edge systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified
testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to SPRI's "Wind
Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems" ES-1.
E. Roofing System Design: Provide roofing systems that have been successfully tested by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure and external fire exposure.
F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70
and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
2.4 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. EPDM Membrane Roofing System; Fully Adhered: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced,
fire-retardant, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.
1. Thickness: 90 mils , nominal.
2. Exposed Face Color: Black.
3. Manufacturers and Products:

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 37
a. Carlisle SynTec Inc.; Sure-Seal EPDM.
b. Firestone Building Products Co.; RubberGard EPDM.
c. Johns Manville, Inc.; JM EPDM.
2.5 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with roofing membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing membrane, of recommended thickness
and compatible with roofing membrane, of same color as roofing membrane, and appropriate
for Project roofing application.
C. Coated Metal Flashing: Manufacturer's standard coated galvanized sheet metal (G90) flashing,
minimum 24 gage, of same color as roofing membrane.
D. Pipe / Stack Flashing: Pre-molded flexible membrane pipe collar with aluminum ring bonded to
base as recommended by roofing system manufacturer.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.
F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
G. Termination Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304 formed stainless steel or extruded alloy 6063
aluminum bars; 2 types, one flat and one flat with upper flange shaped to receive sealant,
locations as indicated; 1 in by 1/8 in thick; predrilled at 8 in centers; with corrosive resistant
fasteners. No plastic bars allowed.
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed inside and outside corner
sheet flashings, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.
I. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard splicing adhesive and splice cleaner or primer and
splice tape with release film.
J. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match roofing
membrane.
2.6 CONCRETE MOISTURE BARRIER TREATMENT
A. Concrete Moisture Barrier Treatment: Two-component, high-performance, non-flammable,
rapid drying, water based, low odor, low VOC, penetrating epoxy; formulated to reduce
moisture vapor transmission and surface alkalinity from concrete substrates, including aged or
freshly placed ("green") concrete, prior to installation of roofing materials.
1. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Aquafin, "Vaportight Coat SG3".

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 38
2.7 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Vapor Retarder: 40 mil composite self-adhesive vapor barrier composed of SBS modified
bitumen and laminated film.
2.8 ROOF INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements of referenced
standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses. Provide
accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with
roofing membrane.
1. Provide insulation thickness required to maintain minimum aged R-value as indicated on
the Drawings.
2. Insulation board thickness of individual insulation layers to be 2 in maximum.
3. Insulation board size to be 4 ft by 4 ft maximum.
4. Provide factory, tapered insulation boards where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate
with 1/4 in per 12 in (1:48) taper, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core
formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to comply with ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1,
Grade 2, (20 psi compressive strength, product shall have glass-fiber mat on both major
surfaces.
C. Cold Fluid-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive
formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1. Bead-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.
a. Basis of Design (Product Standard): OMG Inc.; Olybond 500.
D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
E. Treated Wood Nailers: As specified in Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry".
2.9 ROOF COVER BOARDS
A. Horizontal Roof Cover Boards: Glass-Mat Faced Exterior Gypsum Sheathing Board.
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1177 / C 1177M.
2. Description: Glass-mat faced exterior gypsum sheathing board specifically manufactured

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 39
for use beneath roofing systems. Non-combustible moisture-resistant gypsum core with
glass-mat facings. Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize
short-edge-to-short-edge butt joints and to correspond to support system indicated.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensDeck Prime.
b. Temple-Inland, Inc.; GreenGlass Primed Roof Board.
4. Thickness: Minimum 1/4 in ; or as required to meet performance requirements.
B. Horizontal Roof Cover Boards: Exterior Gypsum Sheathing Board.
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1278 / C 1278M.
2. Description: Exterior gypsum sheathing board specifically manufactured for use beneath
roofing systems. Non-combustible, cellulosic-fiber-reinforced, moisture-resistant gypsum
core. Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize
short-edge-to-short-edge butt joints and to correspond to support system indicated.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. USG; SECUROCK Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board.
4. Thickness: Minimum 1/4 in ; or as required to meet performance requirements.
C. Vertical Cover Boards (Back of Parapet): As specified in Division 06 Section "Exterior Gypsum
Sheathing".
2.10 FLEXIBLE WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting,
surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 in thick, as recommended by
roofing system manufacturer.
2.11 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
A. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Refer to Division 07 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems
and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions, including concrete moisture
content, have been corrected in a manner complying with roofing manufacturer

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 40
recommendations and Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be
construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thickness of insulation.
3. Metal Decking Substrates:
a. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Roof Decking".
4. At cast-in-place concrete or composite metal deck substrates:
a. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
b. Concrete Moisture Testing: Perform one or both of the following tests as
recommended by roofing manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
concrete substrates pass testing.
1) Relative Humidity Test: As recommended by NRCA, perform moisture test
using in situ probes in accordance with ASTM F 2170. Concrete to be
drilled and probes inserted for minimum of 48 hours. Proceed with
installation only after concrete substrates have a maximum 75 percent
relative humidity level measurement or at a level as recommended by
roofing manufacturer. Perform 3 moisture tests for first 1000 sf of concrete
substrate scheduled to receive roofing and 1 test for each additional 1000 sf
or fraction thereof.
2) Manufacturer’sConcrete Moisture Test: Roofing manufacturer’sstandard
moisture test with measurements or results acceptable to roofing
manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work
according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer's written installation instructions.
2. Accepted submittals.
3. Contract Documents.

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 41
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and specifications for
cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors
which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in
Work.
B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 075013
Submittal.com Sample Project 42
SECTION 231123

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
6. Service meters.
7. Concrete bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Service Regulators: 65 psig (450 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less More than 0.5 psig

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 43
(3.45 kPa) but not more than 2 psig (13.8 kPa).
C. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is
more than 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) but not more than 2 psig (13.8 kPa), and is reduced to secondary
pressure of 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Piping specialties.
2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of
selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
5. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings and
meter bars.
6. Dielectric fittings.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and
elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple
pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building
structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50).
2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for pressure regulator assembly.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown
and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.
B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with
other services and utilities.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
D. Welding certificates.

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 44
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging
coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of
proposed interruption of natural-gas service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Architect's and
Construction Manager's written permission.
1.11 COORDINATION

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 45
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind
finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS


A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket
welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends.
4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including
bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.
b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,
and spiral-wound metal gaskets.
e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel
underground.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of
epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
6. Mechanical Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc.
2) Smith-Blair, Inc.
b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.
c. Buna-nitrile seals.

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 46
d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or
steel pipe to steel pipe.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES


A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa).
6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm.)
B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.
2. Nitrile seals.
3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.
4. For indoor or outdoor applications.
5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
C. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).
D. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 47
3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).
E. T-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer
maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 750 psig (5170 kPa).
F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threadedend
connection.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying
with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are
prohibited.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply with
ASME B16.33.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).
2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 48
valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller.
6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG"
permanently marked on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).
2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
8. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa).
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

H. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 49
following:
a. Flowserve.
b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.
c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
d. Milliken Valve Company.
e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.
3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
8. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa).
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS


A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3. Elevation compensator.
4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for
regulators NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
d. Invensys.

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 50
e. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not
exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig (690 kPa).
C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
e. Invensys.
f. Maxitrol Company.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 51
8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.

D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.
b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
c. Harper Wyman Co.
d. Maxitrol Company.
e. SCP, Inc.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.
3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa).

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS


A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Hart Industries International, Inc.
d. Jomar International Ltd.
e. Matco-Norca, Inc.

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 52
f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.
2. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Matco-Norca, Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.
2. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solderjoint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 53
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils
(0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in
a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to
determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of
accidental ignition.
3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade.
Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade,
install it in containment conduit.
C. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 54
manufacturer.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
E. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in
Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel
tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space
adequate for servicing and testing.
D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
D. Welded Joints:

END OF SECTION

SECTION 231123
Submittal.com Sample Project 55
SECTION 260519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Alpha Wire.
2. Belden Inc.
3. Encore Wire Corporation.
4. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
5. Southwire Incorporated.
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THW-2,
Type THHN-2-THWN-2 and Type XHHW-2.
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for armored cable, Type AC,
metal-clad cable, Type MC, non-metallic Type NM, with ground wire.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

SECTION 260519
Submittal.com Sample Project 56
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Gardner Bender.
3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS


A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2,
single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Type XHHW-2,
single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, and Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2,
single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-
THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, and Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC may be used in guest suite units from the
corridor junction box. Circuits from the panelboards to junction boxes in the corridors shall be in
raceway.

SECTION 260519
Submittal.com Sample Project 57
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway and Type XHHW-2, single conductors in
raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

SECTION 260519
Submittal.com Sample Project 58
Cabling."
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections :
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and
larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.
Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.
B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION

END OF SUBMITTAL.COM SAMPLE SPEC BOOK

SECTION 260519
Submittal.com Sample Project 59
TECHNICAL DATA

WATERSTOP-RX®
EXPANDING CONCRETE JOINT WATERSTOP

DESCRIPTION joints, new to existing concrete construction, skinning over and curing. CETSEAL may be
WATERSTOP-RX is a hydrophilic strip wa- irregular surfaces, and around through-wall applied to damp surfaces, but not in stand-
terstop designed to stop water infiltration penetrations, such as plumbing and utility ing water.
through cast-in-place concrete construction pipes. Additionally WATERSTOP-RX can seal Tightly butt coil ends together to form a con-
joints by expanding upon contact with water around concrete pilings and steel H-piles tinuous waterstop - do not overlap coil ends.
to form a positive seal against the concrete. passing through the slab. WATERSTOP-RX Place in maximum practical lengths to mini-
The key to WATERSTOP-RX’s effectiveness is works in both continuous hydrostatic and in- mize coil end joints. Where required, cut coils
its superior expansion to seal and fill voids termittent hydrostatic conditions. with a sharp knife or utility blade to fit coil
and cracks in the concrete. WATERSTOP-RX ends together. Make horizontal to vertical
is an active bentonite/butyl-rubber based WATERSTOP-RX products are designed for transitions by abutting product coil sections
waterstop that is designed to replace pas- reinforced structural concrete with a mini- together, no special accessory pieces are re-
sive PVC/Rubber dumbbell waterstops, mum of 20N/mm2 (3,000 psi) compressive quired.
thereby eliminating the requirement of spe- strength. RX-101 and RX-101T are designed
cial pieces, split-forming and seam welding. for concrete 200 mm (8”) thick or greater At structural and pipe penetrations, cut into
WATERSTOP-RX has been successfully tested with two rows of reinforcing steel. RX-102 strips to fit around the penetration. Apply to
by independent testing firms to over 60 me- is designed for vertical concrete 150 mm adhesive and abut coil ends together.
ters (200 feet) of hydrostatic water pressure, (6”) thick or greater; and horizontal concrete
under both continuous immersion and wet/ no less than 100 mm (4”) thick. RX-102 On irregular surfaces such as stone or rough
dry cycling. should be used in concrete with one row of concrete, make sure WATERSTOP-RX remains
steel reinforcement, concrete curbs, planter in direct contact with the substrate along the
WATERSTOP-RX is available in three sizes walls, fountains, and lightweight structural entire installation. There should not be any
and shapes (see Product Table). WA- concrete. air gap between the WATERSTOP-RX and the
TERSTOP-RX 101 is produced in a rect- WATERSTOP-RX is a reliable, cost-effective substrate.
angular shape measuring 25 x 20 mm means to stop water infiltration through con-
(1” x 3/4”). WATERSTOP-RX 101T is produced crete cold joints. It can also be used around Footing/Wall Joint
in a trapezoidal shape measuring 31 x 12 pipe and structural penetrations
mm (1-1/4” x 1/2”) with a reinforcing plastic
scrim embedded in the top surface for high WATERSTOP-RX
tensile strength. The patented trapezoidal
INSTALLATION
Surface preparation: Surfaces should be
shape distributes the expansive force over a
clean and dry. Remove all dirt, rocks, rust or
greater area and allows the concrete to flow
other construction debris. Do not install WA-
more readily over the product during place-
TERSTOP-RX in standing water or on an iced
ment. WATERSTOP-RX 102 is produced in a
substrate.
half-circle (Crescent) shape measuring 19 x 9
mm (3/4” x 3/8”).
Adhesive: Apply a continuous bead of CET-
SEAL along the substrate where WATERSTOP-
Though WATERSTOP-RX possesses good
RX will be installed. Assure proper 75 mm (3”)
resistance to many chemicals, the waterstop
concrete coverage will be maintained. Keep
is not intended to be used as the primary
the nozzle tip pressed against the concrete
joint sealant for chemical containment ves-
at a 45o angle during application.
sels. Consult manufacturer for guidance re-
garding chemical compatibility for secondary
Installation: After applying a continuous bead
chemical containment applications. Addition- Place WATERSTOP-RX
of CETSEAL, remove release paper, then firm-
ally, WATERSTOP-RX is not an expansion joint inside of outer most
ly press the entire length of WATERSTOP-RX
sealant; contact CETCO for expansion joint reinforcing dowels
onto the adhesive. For vertical and overhead 75 mm
applications. (3”)
applications, firmly press a minimum of 15
Minimum 75 mm (3”)
seconds to assure adhesion. For best results
to exterior surface of
APPLICATIONS apply WATERSTOP-RX within 15 minutes of
wall
Applications include both vertical and hori- adhesive installation. WATERSTOP-RX must
zontal non-moving concrete construction be placed into adhesive prior to CETSEAL General Application Detail

North America: 847.851.1800 | 800.527.9948 | www.cetco.com


TECHNICAL DATA

WATERSTOP-RX®
EXPANDING CONCRETE JOINT WATERSTOP

Installation with REVO-FIX: REVO-FIX is a alone. Do not use any other adhesive or con- In conditions where severe ground water
steel mesh used to mechanically secure struction sealant, except CETSEAL, to secure chemical contamination exists, or is expected,
WATERSTOP-RX 101 into position using the WATERSTOP-RX. consult manufacturer for product chemical
accompanying supplied fasteners. Remove compatibility information.
release paper and place the WATERSTOP-RX WATERSTOP-RX is not designed, nor intended
on the concrete substrate. Then place REVO- to function as an expansion joint sealant. For
FIX strips over the WATERSTOP-RX, lapping precast concrete applications, contact manu-
PACKAGING
RX-101: 30 m (100 ft./box)
the strip ends by 25 mm (1”) maximum. Nail facturer for product suitability and for any spe-
RX-101T: 36 m (120 ft./box)
through LAP with fastener supplied, and install cial installation requirements.
RX-102: 60 m (200 ft./box)
one fastener 300 mm (12”) on center along
CETSEAL and REVO-FIX are packaged sepa-
the REVO-FIX. WATERSTOP-RX products are designed for
rately.
structural concrete with a minimum of 20N/
End-to-end or end-to-side REVO-FIX junctions mm2 3,000 psi compressive strength. WA-
are created by simple butt joints pressed firm- TERSTOP-RX 101 and RX-101T require a ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
ly together. Start at junctions; do not stretch minimum of 3” (75 mm) of concrete coverage. CETSEAL is a multi-purpose, single compo-
WATERSTOP-RX to fit. Do not overlap water- WATERSTOP-RX 102 requires a minimum con- nent polyether moisture cure adhesive used
stop. crete coverage of 2” (50 mm). WATERSTOP-RX to secure WATERSTOP-RX into position. Apply
should only be used in applications where the a continuous bead of CETSEAL to substrate
product is completely encapsulated within the then install WATERSTOP-RX before CETSEAL
LIMITATIONS concrete. skins over and cures. Adhesive yield will vary
WATERSTOP-RX is not a self-adhering product.
with use, substrate and application.
CETSEAL or REVO-FIX is required to secure
WATERSTOP-RX should not be prehydrated by
WATERSTOP-RX to concrete, metal, or PVC
being subjected to submersion or remain in
(Pipe) surfaces. Mechanical fasteners should
extended contact with water prior to encap-
be used with REVO-FIX to secure WATERSTOP-
sulation in concrete. If the product exhibits
RX 101; and fasteners can be used in con-
considerable swell prior to encapsulation in
junction with CETSEAL. Mechanical fasteners
the concrete, it must be replaced with new
should not be used to secure WATERSTOP-RX
material.

WATERSTOP-RX PRODUCT TABLE


PRODUCT SIZE ROLL CROSS-SECTION SHAPE UNIT QTY/CARTON MIN CONCRETE
LENGTH COVERAGE
RX-101 25 x 20 mm (1” X 3/4”) 5 m (16’ 8”) Rectangle 30 m (100 LF) 75 mm (3”)
RX-101T 31 x 12 mm (1-1/4” X 1/2”) 6 m (20’) Trapezoid with Poly Scrim 36 m (120 LF) 75 mm (3”)
Reinforcement
RX-102 19 x 9 mm (3/4” x 3/8”) 10 m (33’ 4”) Half-Circle 60 m (200 LF) 50 mm (2”)

FORM: TDS_Bentogrout_AM_201308_V1

North America: 847.851.1800 | 800.527.9948 | www.cetco.com


TECHNICAL DATA

WATERSTOP-RX®
EXPANDING CONCRETE JOINT WATERSTOP

5 FAST & E ASY


INSTALL ATION STEPS
LIMITED WARRANTY
STEP 1 Specifications and other information contained herein supersedes all
previously printed matter and are subject to change without notice.
CLEAN SURFACE
All goods sold by seller are warranted to be free from defects in mate-
rial and workmanship. The foregoing warranty is in lieu of and excludes
all other warranties not expressly set forth herein, whether expressed
or implied by operation of law or otherwise, including but not limited to
any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness.
REMOVE ALL DIRT AND DEBRIS
Seller shall not be liable for incidental or consequential losses, dam-
STEP 2 ages or expenses, directly or indirectly arising for the sale, handling
or use of goods, or from any other case relating thereto, and seller’s
APPLY liability hereunder in any case is expressly limited to the replacement
ADHESIVE (in the form originally shipped) of goods not complying with the agree-
ment or at seller’s election, to the repayment of, or crediting buyer
with, an amount equal to the purchase price of such goods, whether
such claims are for breach of warranty or negligence.
APPLY CETSEAL
Any claim by buyer with reference to the goods sold hereunder for any
cause shall be deemed waived by buyer unless submitted to seller in
STEP 3 Minimum
75 mm (3”) writing within thirty (30) days from the date buyer discovered or should
PLACE of discovered, any claimed breach.
WATERSTOP
Materials should be inspected and tested by purchaser prior to their
use if product quality is subject to verification after shipment. Perfor-
mance guarantees are normally supplied by the applicator.

REMOVE RELEASE PAPER THEN PRESS TYPICAL PROPERTIES


FIRMLY AGAINST CETSEAL. MAINTAIN
MIN. CONCRETE COVERAGE DEPTH PROPERTY TEST METHOD VALUE
Hydrostatic Head Independent Test 70 m (231 Ft.)
STEP 4 Resistance
Wet / Dry Cycling Independent Test No Effect
BUTT COIL ENDS (25 Cycles @ 231 ft)
Adhesion to Concrete Independent Test Excellent
Using CETSEAL

TIGHTLY BUTT COIL ENDS TO FORM A


CONTINUOUS WATERSTOP. DO NOT
OVERLAP COIL ENDS

STEP 5 WATERSTOP-RX
Concrete
POUR
CONCRETE

North America: 847.851.1800 | 800.527.9948 | www.cetco.com


TECHNICAL
TECHNICAL DATA
DATA

WATERSTOP-RX®
EXPANDING CONCRETE JOINT WATERSTOP

TYPICAL PRODUCT APPLICATIONS


WATERSTOP-RX 101 and RX 101T WATERSTOP-RX 102
•V  ertical and horizontal concrete 200 mm (8”) thick or greater •V  ertical concrete 150 mm (6”) thick or greater.
•C  oncrete with two rows of steel reinforcement •H  orizontal concrete 100 mm (4”) thick or greater
•S  hotcrete Foundation Walls •C  oncrete with one row of steel reinforcement
•H  igh hydrostatic pressures •S  labs containing only wire mesh
• T ie-back plates and penetrations •F  ountains / Planter Boxes / Curbs
• Penetrations

Install WATERSTOP-RX at all


Install WATERSTOP-RX at all wall pour joints
slab pour joints and connect
with wall joint installation to Reinforcing Steel
form continuous waterstop

Install WATERSTOP-RX at
footing/wall joint

Install WATERSTOP-RX SLAB JOINT SECTION DETAIL


inside of outer most
reinforcing steel

75 mm (3”) min WATERSTOP-RX Reinforced slab


concrete coverage (min 75 mm (3”) coverage)

Typical WATERSTOP-RX Foundation Detailing

WATERSTOP-RX WATERSTOP-RX
(min 75 mm (3”) coverage) Non-shrink grout (min 75 mm (3”) coverage)

Concrete
Pipe Pipe sleeve Pipe
Concrete
Cast-in-Place Penetration Sleeved Penetration Detail

North America: 847.851.1800 | 800.527.9948 | www.cetco.com


UPDATED: AUGUST 2016
© 2015 CETCO. IMPORTANT: The information contained herein supersedes all previous printed versions, and is believed to be accurate and reliable.
For the most up-to-date information, please visit www.CETCO.com. CETCO accepts no responsibility for the results obtained through application of this product.
All products are sold on the understanding that the user is solely responsible for determining their suitability for the intended use and for proper use and disposal
of the product. CETCO MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR SUITABILITY FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY SALE
OF THE PRODUCTS DESCRIBED HEREIN. CETCO reserves the right to update information without notice.

FORM: TDS_WATERSTOP-RX_AM_EN_201608_V3
DIVISION 3
Common Work Results

CONCRETE EXPANSION JOINT for Concrete 03 05 00

PPRRRO
OD
O DU
D UC
UC TN
CT
T O.. 66991177--0055
NO
O

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
QUIKRETE Concrete Expansion Joints are preformed, rigid cane fiber boards containing
durable asphalt, for insertion into concrete expansion and isolation joints.
PRODUCT USE
QUIKRETE Concrete Expansion Joint can be used in all standard
concrete construction, such as highways, runways, parking garages,
driveways, sidewalks, and floor slabs. Concrete Expansion Joint can
also be used as a buffer between dissimilar materials such as columns,
INSTALLATION
manhole covers, and adjacent constructions.
Unless otherwise specified, Expansion Joint Strips should be placed
perpendicular to the finished surface of the concrete. Strips should
FEATURES
be placed so that the edges are flush with the finished concrete
• Will not become brittle in cold weather; not damaged by freezing or
surface unless surface capping is specified. They can be cut,
thawing.
trimmed, and drilled easily with standard tools.
• Textured surface provides an excellent interface with concrete
• Resists working loose during concrete expansion or contraction
Expansion joints should be placed at approximate intervals of 31’ to
• Easy to cut and handle on the jobsite
50’ (9.4 to 15.2 m) when using ½ filler. Additional control joints will be
required. For sidewalks, the joints should divide the walk into
SIZES
approximately square sections. For driveways and patios, maximum
• QUIKRETE Concrete Expansion Joint – 5 ‘ long x 4” wide x ½” thick
joint spacing is ten feet.
TECHNICAL DATA
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
WARRANTY
ASTM International
The QUIKRETE® Companies warrant this product to be of
• ASTM D1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint
merchantable quality when used or applied in accordance with the
Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
instructions herein. The product is not warranted as suitable for any
Resilient Bituminous Types) (*With the compressive requirement
purpose or use other than the general purpose for which it is
of Section 5.2 modified to 10 psi minimum and 25 psi
intended. Liability under this warranty is limited to the replacement of
maximum due to the material type)
its product (as purchased) found to be defective, or at the shipping
companies’ option, to refund the purchase price. In the event of a
claim under this warranty, notice must be given to The QUIKRETE®
Companies in writing. This limited warranty is issued and accepted in
lieu of all other express warranties and expressly excludes liability for
consequential damages.
The QUIKRETE® Companies
One Securities Centre
3490 Piedmont Rd., NE, Suite 1300 Atlanta, GA 30305
(404) 634-9100 • Fax: (404) 842-1425

* Refer to www.quikrete.com for the most current technical data, MSDS, and guide specifications
SAFETY DATA SHEET

1. Identification
Product identifier L&M Cure Concentrate
Other means of identification None.
Recommended use Concrete curing compound.
Recommended restrictions None known.
Manufacturer/Importer/Supplier/Distributor information
Company Name LATICRETE International
Address 1 Laticrete Park, N
Bethany, CT 06524
Telephone (203)-393-0010
Contact person Steve Fine
Website www.laticrete.com
Emergency phone number Call CHEMTREC day or night
USA/Canada - 1.800.424.9300
Mexico - 1.800.681.9531
Outside USA/Canada
1.703.527.3887

2. Hazard(s) identification
Physical hazards Not classified.

Health hazards Skin corrosion/irritation Category 2


Serious eye damage/eye irritation Category 1
OSHA defined hazards Not classified.

Label elements

Signal word Danger


Hazard statement Causes skin irritation. Causes serious eye damage.
Precautionary statement
Prevention Wash thoroughly after handling. Wear protective gloves/eye protection/face protection.
Response If on skin: Wash with plenty of water. If skin irritation occurs: Get medical advice/attention. Take
off contaminated clothing and wash it before reuse. If in eyes: Rinse cautiously with water for
several minutes. Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing. Immediately
call a poison center/doctor.
Storage Store away from incompatible materials.
Disposal Dispose of contents/container in accordance with local/regional/national/international regulations.
Hazard(s) not otherwise Not classified.
classified (HNOC)

3. Composition/information on ingredients
Mixtures
Chemical name CAS number %
Sodium silicate 1344-09-8 23 - 28

Composition comments All concentrations are in percent by weight unless ingredient is a gas. Gas concentrations are in
percent by volume.

L&M Cure Concentrate SDS US


921269 Version #: 02 Revision date: 15-July-2014 Issue date: 15-July-2014 1/6
4. First-aid measures
Inhalation Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing. Get medical
attention if any discomfort continues.
Skin contact Take off immediately all contaminated clothing. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse. Get
medical attention immediately.
Eye contact Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove contact lenses, if
present and easy to do. Continue rinsing. Get medical attention immediately.
Ingestion Rinse mouth. Do not induce vomiting. If vomiting occurs, keep head low so that stomach content
doesn't get into the lungs. Get medical attention if any discomfort continues.
Most important Irritation of eyes and mucous membranes. Permanent eye damage including blindness could
symptoms/effects, acute and result.
delayed
Indication of immediate Provide general supportive measures and treat symptomatically.
medical attention and special
treatment needed
General information Ensure that medical personnel are aware of the material(s) involved, and take precautions to
protect themselves.

5. Fire-fighting measures
Suitable extinguishing media Water spray, foam, dry powder or carbon dioxide.
Unsuitable extinguishing Do not use water jet as an extinguisher, as this will spread the fire.
media
Specific hazards arising from By heating and fire, irritating vapors/gases may be formed.
the chemical
Special protective equipment Self-contained breathing apparatus and full protective clothing must be worn in case of fire.
and precautions for firefighters Selection of respiratory protection for firefighting: follow the general fire precautions indicated in
the workplace.
Fire fighting Move containers from fire area if you can do so without risk. Use water spray to cool unopened
equipment/instructions containers.
General fire hazards No unusual fire or explosion hazards noted.

6. Accidental release measures


Personal precautions, Keep unnecessary personnel away. Wear appropriate protective equipment and clothing during
protective equipment and clean-up. Do not touch damaged containers or spilled material unless wearing appropriate
emergency procedures protective clothing. Ensure adequate ventilation. Local authorities should be advised if significant
spillages cannot be contained.
Methods and materials for Large Spills: Stop the flow of material, if this is without risk. Dike the spilled material, where this is
containment and cleaning up possible. Absorb in vermiculite, dry sand or earth and place into containers. Following product
recovery, flush area with water.

Small Spills: Wipe up with absorbent material (e.g. cloth, fleece). Clean surface thoroughly to
remove residual contamination.

Never return spills in original containers for re-use. For waste disposal, see Section 13 of the SDS.
Environmental precautions Avoid release to the environment. Do not discharge into drains, water courses or onto the ground.
Environmental manager must be informed of all major releases.

7. Handling and storage


Precautions for safe handling Do not breathe mist or vapor. Do not get in eyes, on skin, on clothing. Use with adequate
ventilation. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment. Observe good industrial hygiene
practices.
Conditions for safe storage, Keep container tightly closed. Store in a cool and well-ventilated place. Store away from
including any incompatibilities incompatible materials (See Section 10).

8. Exposure controls/personal protection


Occupational exposure limits No exposure limits noted for ingredient(s).
Biological limit values No biological exposure limits noted for the ingredient(s).

L&M Cure Concentrate SDS US


921269 Version #: 02 Revision date: 15-July-2014 Issue date: 15-July-2014 2/6
Appropriate engineering Good general ventilation (typically 10 air changes per hour) should be used. Ventilation rates
controls should be matched to conditions. If applicable, use process enclosures, local exhaust ventilation,
or other engineering controls to maintain airborne levels below recommended exposure limits. If
exposure limits have not been established, maintain airborne levels to an acceptable level. Provide
eyewash station.
Individual protection measures, such as personal protective equipment
Eye/face protection Wear safety glasses with side shields (or goggles). Face-shield.
Skin protection
Hand protection Wear appropriate chemical resistant gloves.
Other Wear appropriate chemical resistant clothing.
Respiratory protection In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment.
Thermal hazards Wear appropriate thermal protective clothing, when necessary.
General hygiene Always observe good personal hygiene measures, such as washing after handling the material
considerations and before eating, drinking, and/or smoking. Routinely wash work clothing and protective
equipment to remove contaminants.

9. Physical and chemical properties


Appearance Clear liquid.
Physical state Liquid.
Form Liquid.
Color Clear.
Odor Odorless.
Odor threshold Not available.
pH 11.3
Melting point/freezing point Not applicable.
Initial boiling point and boiling Not applicable.
range
Flash point Non flammable.
Evaporation rate Not applicable.
Flammability (solid, gas) Not applicable.
Upper/lower flammability or explosive limits
Flammability limit - lower Not available.
(%)
Flammability limit - upper Not available.
(%)
Explosive limit - lower (%) Not available.
Explosive limit - upper (%) Not available.
Vapor pressure Not applicable.
Vapor density Not applicable.
Relative density 1.39
Solubility(ies)
Solubility (water) Soluble.
Partition coefficient Not available.
(n-octanol/water)
Auto-ignition temperature Not available.
Decomposition temperature Not available.
Viscosity Not available.

10. Stability and reactivity


Reactivity The product is stable and non-reactive under normal conditions of use, storage and transport.
Chemical stability Material is stable under normal conditions.
Possibility of hazardous Will not occur.
reactions
Conditions to avoid Heat, flames and sparks. Contact with incompatible materials.

L&M Cure Concentrate SDS US


921269 Version #: 02 Revision date: 15-July-2014 Issue date: 15-July-2014 3/6
Incompatible materials Strong acids.
Hazardous decomposition Silicon oxides.
products

11. Toxicological information


Information on likely routes of exposure
Inhalation In high concentrations, vapors may be irritating to the respiratory system.
Skin contact Causes skin irritation.
Eye contact Causes serious eye damage.
Ingestion Ingestion may cause irritation and malaise.
Symptoms related to the Irritation of eyes and mucous membranes. Permanent eye damage including blindness could
physical, chemical and result.
toxicological characteristics
Information on toxicological effects
Acute toxicity May cause discomfort if swallowed.
Components Species Test Results
Sodium silicate (CAS 1344-09-8)
Acute
Dermal
LD50 Rat > 5000 mg/kg, 24 Hours
Inhalation
LC50 Rat > 2.06 mg/l, 4 Hours
Oral
LD50 Rat 3400 mg/kg
Skin corrosion/irritation Causes skin irritation.
Serious eye damage/eye Causes serious eye damage.
irritation
Respiratory or skin sensitization
Respiratory sensitization No data available.
Skin sensitization Not a skin sensitizer.
Germ cell mutagenicity No data available to indicate product or any components present at greater than 0.1% are
mutagenic or genotoxic.
Carcinogenicity This product is not considered to be a carcinogen by IARC, ACGIH, NTP, or OSHA.
OSHA Specifically Regulated Substances (29 CFR 1910.1001-1050)
Not listed.
Reproductive toxicity No data available.
Specific target organ toxicity - No data available.
single exposure
Specific target organ toxicity - No data available.
repeated exposure
Aspiration hazard No data available.
Chronic effects Frequent or prolonged contact may defat and dry the skin, leading to discomfort and dermatitis.
Further information No other specific acute or chronic health impact noted.

12. Ecological information


Ecotoxicity The product is not classified as environmentally hazardous. However, this does not exclude the
possibility that large or frequent spills can have a harmful or damaging effect on the environment.
Persistence and degradability No data is available on the degradability of this product.
Bioaccumulative potential No data available for this product.
Mobility in soil No data available.
Mobility in general The product is soluble in water.
Other adverse effects No data available.

L&M Cure Concentrate SDS US


921269 Version #: 02 Revision date: 15-July-2014 Issue date: 15-July-2014 4/6
13. Disposal considerations
Disposal instructions Collect and reclaim or dispose in sealed containers at licensed waste disposal site. This material
and its container must be disposed of as hazardous waste. Do not allow this material to drain into
sewers/water supplies. Do not contaminate ponds, waterways or ditches with chemical or used
container. Dispose of contents/container in accordance with local/regional/national/international
regulations.
Hazardous waste code The waste code should be assigned in discussion between the user, the producer and the waste
disposal company.
Waste from residues / unused Dispose of in accordance with local regulations. Empty containers or liners may retain some
products product residues. This material and its container must be disposed of in a safe manner (see:
Disposal instructions).
Contaminated packaging Empty containers should be taken to an approved waste handling site for recycling or disposal.
Since emptied containers may retain product residue, follow label warnings even after container is
emptied.

14. Transport information


DOT
Not regulated as dangerous goods.
IATA
Not regulated as dangerous goods.
IMDG
Not regulated as dangerous goods.
Transport in bulk according to Not applicable.
Annex II of MARPOL 73/78 and
the IBC Code

15. Regulatory information


US federal regulations This product is a "Hazardous Chemical" as defined by the OSHA Hazard Communication
Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200.
TSCA Section 12(b) Export Notification (40 CFR 707, Subpt. D)
Not regulated.
OSHA Specifically Regulated Substances (29 CFR 1910.1001-1050)
Not listed.
CERCLA Hazardous Substance List (40 CFR 302.4)
Not listed.
Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 (SARA)
Hazard categories Immediate Hazard - Yes
Delayed Hazard - No
Fire Hazard - No
Pressure Hazard - No
Reactivity Hazard - No
SARA 302 Extremely hazardous substance
Not listed.
SARA 311/312 Hazardous Yes
chemical
SARA 313 (TRI reporting)
Not regulated.

Other federal regulations


Clean Air Act (CAA) Section 112 Hazardous Air Pollutants (HAPs) List
Not regulated.
Clean Air Act (CAA) Section 112(r) Accidental Release Prevention (40 CFR 68.130)
Not regulated.
Safe Drinking Water Act Not regulated.
(SDWA)
US state regulations This product does not contain a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
US. Massachusetts RTK - Substance List
Not regulated.
L&M Cure Concentrate SDS US
921269 Version #: 02 Revision date: 15-July-2014 Issue date: 15-July-2014 5/6
US. New Jersey Worker and Community Right-to-Know Act
Not listed.
US. Pennsylvania Worker and Community Right-to-Know Law
Not listed.
US. Rhode Island RTK
Not regulated.
US. California Proposition 65
Not Listed.
International Inventories
Country(s) or region Inventory name On inventory (yes/no)*
Australia Australian Inventory of Chemical Substances (AICS) Yes
Canada Domestic Substances List (DSL) Yes
Canada Non-Domestic Substances List (NDSL) No
China Inventory of Existing Chemical Substances in China (IECSC) Yes
Europe European Inventory of Existing Commercial Chemical No
Substances (EINECS)
Europe European List of Notified Chemical Substances (ELINCS) Yes
Japan Inventory of Existing and New Chemical Substances (ENCS) Yes
Korea Existing Chemicals List (ECL) Yes
New Zealand New Zealand Inventory Yes
Philippines Philippine Inventory of Chemicals and Chemical Substances Yes
(PICCS)
United States & Puerto Rico Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) Inventory Yes
*A "Yes" indicates this product complies with the inventory requirements administered by the governing country(s).
A "No" indicates that one or more components of the product are not listed or exempt from listing on the inventory administered by the governing
country(s).

16. Other information, including date of preparation or last revision


Issue date 15-July-2014
Revision date 15-July-2014
Version # 02
NFPA ratings
0
2 0

List of abbreviations

References HSDB® - Hazardous Substances Data Bank


Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances (RTECS)
Disclaimer The information in this (M)SDS was obtained from sources which we believe are reliable but
cannot guarantee. Additionally, your use of this information is beyond our control and may be
beyond our knowledge. Therefore, the information is provided without any representation or
warranty express or implied.

L&M Cure Concentrate SDS US


921269 Version #: 02 Revision date: 15-July-2014 Issue date: 15-July-2014 6/6
Mark 58FT/58A Series

Back Pressure Regulators


CRN Registration Number Available
Cage Trim Back Pressure Regulators
Mark 58FT installation – designed to be
installed in a "T" fashion such that the fluid nor-
mally flows in one side and out the other side,
with the flow being relieved through the bottom
bypass when the pressure exceeds the setting.
Mark 58A installation – designed to be
installed with one side port as an inlet and the
other side port plugged with the flow being
relieved through the bottom bypass when the
pressure exceeds the setting.

The Mark 58 is available in sizes up to 2"


(DN50) in a wide variety of body materials.
Diaphragms can be either Stainless Steel or
elastomer. Low flow versions with Cv values as

Mark 58FT/58A Cage Trim Back Pressure Regulators


low as 0.21 (0,18 Kv) are available in certain
sizes.

Features MK58FT installation


• Easy to maintain and service – remove bot-
tom entry cage to access plug; diaphragm
accessible from top
• Large effective diaphragm area – reduces
droop for increased accuracy and sensitivity
• Large orifices and body passages – provides
high flow capacities
• "Tight Shutoff" – choice of hard (ANSI CL IV)
or soft (ANSI CL VI) bubble tight seats
• Versatile application – use on steam, air, gas
liquids or chemicals

MK58A installation

Jordan Valve, a division of Richards Industries


3170 Wasson Road • Cincinnati, OH 45209
513.533.5600 • 800.543.7311 • 513.871.0105 (f)
[email protected] • www.jordanvalve.com
Mark 58FT/58A Cage Trim Back Pressure Regulator

Specifications
Sizes: 1/4" through 2" (DN8 through DN50) Spring Ranges PSI (BAR)
End Connections Inlet & Flow Thru Size (DN) PSI BAR
• Threaded — FNPT, BSPT, BSPP 1/4" to 1/2" 1-10; 5-25; 20-50; 0,1-0,7; 0,3-1,7; 1,4-3,5;
(DN8 to DN15) 40-200; 175-275 2,8-13,8; 12,1-19,0
• ANSI Flanges — 150#, 300# (1/2" – 2") 3/4" & 1" 1-7; 5-22; 15-105; 0,1-0,5; 0,3-1,5; 1,0-7,2;
• DIN Flanges — PN10/16, PN25/40 (1/2" – 2") (DN20 & DN25) 95-145; 135-215 6,6-10,0; 9,3-14,8
• See accessories for bottom/bypass connections 1-1/4" to 2" 1-20; 15-70; 60-105; 0,1-1,4; 1,0-4,8; 4,1-7,2;
(DN32 to DN50) 95-150 6,6-10,3
other than FNPT
Body Materials Maximum Inlet Pressure: 300 psi (20,7 bar)
• Ductile Iron
• Bronze
• Carbon Steel
Cv (Kv) Values
• Stainless Steel
Flow-Thru Cv (Kv)
Hard Seat Plug Valve Size In. (DN) FL
58FT Only
• 17-4 plug with EPDM (Option 'H') -20°F to 500°F
1/4" (DN8) 0.80 3.1 (2,7)
(-29°C to 260°C)
• 17-4 plug with Viton (Option 'F') -20°F to 400°F 3/8" (DN10) 0.80 5.8 (5,0)

(-29°C to 204°C) 1/2" (DN15) 0.80 10.8 (9,3)


3/4" (DN20) 0.80 16.4 (14,1)
1"(DN25) 0.80 26 (22,4)
Soft Seat Plug
1"(DN25) 0.80 26 (22,4)
• Buna-N / 316 (Option 'B') -20°F to 200°F (-29°C
to 93°C) 1-1/4" (DN32) 0.85 55 (47,3)

• Viton / 316 (Option 'V') -20°F to 350°F (-29°C to 1-1/2" (DN40) 0.85 85 (73,1)
177°C) 2" (DN50) 0.85 105 (90,3)
• EPDM / 316 (Option 'J') -20°F to 350°F (-29°C to
177°C) Valve Size In (DN) Diaphragm Cv (Kv)
1/4", 3/8", 1/2" 0.21, 0.42, 0.84, 1.6, 2.6
Stem: 17-4 Ph Stainless Steel (DN8, DN10, DN15)
All
(0,18; 0,36; 0,72; 1,4; 2,2)

Bottom/Bypass Cage 3/4", 1"


All
0.21, 0.42, 0.84, 1.6, 2.9, 4.4
(DN20, DN25) (0,18; 0,36; 0,72; 1,4; 2,5; 3,8)
• BR/DI/CS/SS: 316/316L if threaded
3/4" (DN20) Metal 5.5, 7.9 (4,7; 6,8)
• BR/DI/CS: E-Nickel plated A105 if flanged
3/4" (DN20) Elastomer 6.5, 9.4 (5,6; 8,1)
Cage Seat: Stainless Steel 1" (DN25) Metal 5.7, 8.9 (4,9; 7,7)
1" (DN25) Elastomer 6.8, 11.3 (5,9; 9,7)
Spring Housing: Cast Iron
1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" 1.6, 2.9, 4.4, 5.6, 7.7
All
Diaphragm (DN32, DN40, DN50) (1,4; 2,5; 3,8; 4,8; 6,6)
• Buna-N: -20°F to 200°F (-29°C to 93°C) 1-1/4" (DN32) Metal 13.5, 15.5 (11,6; 13,4)
• EPDM: -20°F to 350°F (-29°C to 177°C); (290°F / 1-1/4" (DN32) Elastomer 17.6, 22.3 (15,2; 19,2)
143°C for continuous steam) 1-1/2" (DN40) Metal 14.2, 16.9 (12,2; 14,6)
• Jorlon: -20°F to 450°F (-29°C to 232°C) 1-1/2" (DN40) Elastomer 18.8, 24.0 (16,2; 20,7)
• 316/316L SST: -20°F to 500°F (-29°C to 260°C) 2" (DN50) Metal 17.4, 21.7 (15,0; 18,7)
• Viton/Nomex: -20°F to 450°F (-29°C to 232°C) 2" (DN50) Elastomer 24.7, 32.4 (21,3; 27,9)

Shutoff
• Hard Seat: ANSI Class IV
• Soft Seat: ANSI Class VI for bubble-tight shutoff

-2-
Mark 58FT/58A Cage Trim Back Pressure Regulator

Dimensions

D • Threaded Ends – inches (metric)


Size Dimensions — Inches (mm) Weight lbs
(DN) A B C D E (kgs)
1/4" (8) 5.0 (127) 7.6 (194) 2.6 (65) 5.0 (127) 1/2" (15) 11 (5)
3/8" (10) 5.0 (127) 7.6 (194) 2.6 (65) 5.0 (127) 1/2" (15) 11 (5)
1/2" (15) 5.0 (127) 7.6 (194) 2.6 (65) 5.0 (127) 1/2" (15) 11 (5)
3/4" (20) 5.0 (127) 8.8 (222) 2.6 (65) 6.9 (174) 1" (25) 20 (9)
1" (25) 5.0 (127) 8.8 (222) 2.6 (65) 6.9 (174) 1" (25) 20 (9)
1-1/4" (32) 7.50 (191) 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238) 2" (50) 68 (31)
1-1/2" (40) 7.50 (191 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238) 2" (50) 68 (31)
2" (50) 7.50 (191 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238) 2" (50) 68 (31)

• Flanged Ends – inches (metric)


Size Flange Dimensions — Inches (mm) Weight
(DN) ANSI (PN)* A1 1 B C1 D E lbs (kgs)

1/2" 150# (10/16) 9.50 (241) 7.62 (194) 2.6 (65) 5.0 (127) 1/2" (15) 15 (7)
C (15) 300# (25/40) 9.75 (248) 7.62 (194) 2.6 (65) 5.0 (127) 1/2" (15) 18 (8)
3/4" 150# (10/16) 9.50 (241) 8.75 (222) 2.6 (66) 6.87 (174) 1" (25) 27 (12)
C1 (20) 300# (25/40) 9.75 (248) 8.75 (222) 2.6 (66) 6.87 (174) 1" (25) 30 (14)
1" 150# (10/16) 9.50 (241) 8.75 (222) 2.6 (66) 6.87 (174) 1" (25) 27 (12)
(25) 300# (25/40) 9.75 (248) 8.75 (222) 2.6 (66) 6.87 (174) 1" (25) 30 (14)
1-1/4" 150# (10/16) 13.00 (330) 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238) 2" (50) 75 (33)
(32) 300# (25/40) 13.25 (337) 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238)
'E' FNPT 2" (50) 81 (37)
A 1-1/2" 150# (10/16) 13.00 (330) 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238) 2" (50) 78 (35)
A1 (40) 300# (25/40) 13.25 (337) 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238) 2" (50) 87 (40)
2" 150# (10/16) 13.00 (330) 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238) 2" (50) 84 (38)
Standard bottom/bypass is FNPT per chart. (50) 300# (25/40) 13.25 (337) 16.8 (426) 4.0 (102) 9.4 (238) 2" (50) 90 (41)
See accessories for optional connections. 1 Not to ANSI
* Other configurations available, consult factory

Ordering Schematic

Model No Size Body Mat'l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Model 1&2 End Connections


58FT Flow thru installation PT NPT
58A Angle flow installation BT BSPT
BP BSPP
SW FSW
Size F5 150# FE
025 1/4" (DN8) F3 300# FE
038 3/8" (DN10) F7 PN10 DIN FE
050 1/2" (DN15) F6 PN16 DIN FE
075 3/4" (DN20) F8 PN25 DIN FE
100 1" (DN25) F4 PN40 DIN FE
125 1-1/4" (DN32)
150 1-1/2" (DN40) ZZ Non-Standard
200 2" (DN50) Note: Standard bottom/bypass port is FNPT.
1/2" for 025-050
Body Material 1" for 075-100
DI Ductile Iron 2" for 125-200
CS Carbon Steel (WCB)
S6 Stainless Steel (CF8M)
BR Bronze
-3-
MK58FT/A/1111/5K/AB
Mark 58FT/58A Cage Trim Back Pressure Regulator

Ordering Schematic (Con't)


Model No Size Body Mat'l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3 Plug Seat Material 7&8 Diaphragm


B Buna-N BN Buna-N
V Viton EP EPDM
J EPDM JL Jorlon
H Hard/EPDM S6 316SST
F Hard/Viton VI Viton
Z Non-Standard ZZ Non-Standard

4 Plug Seat Cv (Kv) 9 & 10 Actuator


1 0.21 (0,18) J 9.4 (8,1) 1/4", 3/8", 1/2" (DN8, DN10, DN15)
2 0.42 (0,36) K 11.3 (9,7) M1 S6 Diaph/Ranges 20-50 & below
3 0.84 (0,72) L 13.4 (11,5) E1 VI, BN, & JL Diaph/Ranges 20-50 & below
4 1.6 (1,4) M 13.5 (11,6) M2 S6 Diaph/Ranges 40-200 & above
6 2.6 (2,2) N 14.2 (12,2) E2 VI, BN, & JL Diaph/Ranges 40-200 & above
7 2.9 (2,5) P 15.5 (13,3) ZZ Non-Standard
8 4.4 (3,8) R 16.9 (14,5) 3/4", 1" (DN20, DN25)
A 5.5 (4,7) T 17.4 (15,0) MD For Metal Diaph (S6) All Ranges
B 5.6 (4,8) U 17.6 (15,1) E1 VI, BN, & JL Diaph/Ranges 5-22 & below
C 5.7 (4,9) V 18.8 (16,2) E2 VI, BN, & JL Diaph/Ranges 15-105 & above
D 6.5 (5,6) X 21.7 (18,7) ZZ Non-Standard
E 6.8 (5,9) Y 22.3 (19,2) 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" (DN32, DN40, DN50)
G 7.7 (6,6) 1 24.0 (20,6) MD For Metal Diaph (S6) / All Ranges
H 7.9 (6,8) 2 24.7 (21,2) ED For Elastomer Di (VI, BN, & JL) / All Ranges
I 8.9 (7,7) 3 32.4 (28,0) ZZ Non-Standard
ZZ Non-Standard

11 & 12 Accessories
5&6 Range 00 None
1/4", 3/8", 1/2" (DN8, DN10, DN15) S6 316SS Bolting
C2 1 - 10 (0,07 - 0,7) SC Oil-Free Clean
C8 5 - 25 (0,3 - 1,7) XC Oxygen Clean
54 20 - 50 (1,4 - 3,5) BP BSPP Bottom/Bypass
CJ 40 - 200 (2,8 - 13,8) BT BSPT Bottom/Bypass
CW 175 - 275 (12,1 - 19,0) F1 125# FE Bottom/Bypass
ZZ Non-Standard F5 150# FE Bottom/Bypass
3/4", 1" (DN20, DN25) F2 250# FE Bottom/Bypass
C1 1 - 7 (0,07 - 0,5) F3 300# FE Bottom/Bypass
C7 5 - 22 (0,3 - 1,5) F7 PN10 DIN FE Bottom/Bypass
CD 15 - 105 (1,0 - 7,2) F6 PN16 DIN FE Bottom/Bypass
CR 95 - 145 (6,6 - 10,0) F8 PN25 DIN FE Bottom/Bypass
CU 135 - 215 (9,3 - 14,8) F4 PN40 DIN FE Bottom/Bypass
ZZ Non-Standard ZZ Non-Standard
1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" (DN32, DN40, DN50)
Note: Optional bottom/bypass port for BSPP and BSPT
C3 1 - 20 (0,07 - 1,4)
1/2" for 025-050
CC 15 - 70 (1,0 - 4,8)
1" for 075-100
CN 60 - 105 (4,1 - 7,2)
2" for 125-200
CS 95 - 150 (6,6 - 10,3)
Matches valve line size if flanged
ZZ Non-Standard
Contact factory for other options

Jordan Valve, a division of Richards Industries


3170 Wasson Road • Cincinnati, OH 45209
513.533.5600 • 800.543.7311 • 513.871.0105 (f)
[email protected] • www.jordanvalve.com
Section:

#:

Specified:

Item submitted:

Sample License - Sample Project.pdf

Provided by: PBD INC


v TYMAN

[email protected]
This is a sample license.
Section:

#:

Specified:

Item submitted:

GAFGLAS_80_Ultima_Base_Sheet_Data_sheet.pdf

Provided by: PBD INC


v TYMAN

[email protected]
GAFGLAS® #80 Ultima™ Base Sheet

Updated: 8/16
GAFGLAS
®

#80 ULTIMA BASE SHEET ™

Description Advantages
GAFGLAS® #80 Ultima™ Base Sheet • Helps prevent splitting and
is a high-performance, asphalt-coated, leakage — Closed-pore design
glass-reinforced roofing base sheet. means asphalt doesn’t bleed
Special Loctite™ closed-pore design through, so system remains
prevents bleed-through while provid- independent of deck movement
ing Iong-lasting leak protection in a when mechanically attached.
variety of demanding applications. • Saves labor—Rolls out flatter
Uses and installs easier than
competitive base sheets.
Heavyweight construction is ideal
for all premium roofing systems: • Reliable performance —
Resists long-term curling and
• For ultimate leak protection... shrinkage that can cause
in applications when the premature roof failure (as can
potential cost of damage happen with organic products).
from a leak is severe.
• Inorganic Micro Weave™ Core—
•A
 s an effective flame retarder... Prevents decay and provides
when used in torch-applied superior tensile strength with
modified bitumen systems. dimensional stability.
• In place of organic felts... • Highest fire rating—For use in
under tile roofs or in BUR UL Class A rated assemblies.
systems.
• System guarantees are available
•G
 reat for nailable systems... for up to 20 years.*
where bleed-through can
cause premature failure
from deck movement Applicable Standards
(especially plywood decks). Meets ASTM D4601, Type II
FM Approved
• For difficult roofing situations...
ICC ESR-1274
where the performance of a
lighter-weight base sheet is Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved

inadequate. State of Florida Approved


UL/ULC Listed
• Enhances many systems...
when used in place of standard
base sheets, improves the
overall performance of a BUR or Product Specifications (nominal)
modified bitumen system. Roll Size 2 squares
(214 gross sq. ft.) (19.9 m2)
• Superior investment...when life
cycle cost is more important Roll Length 65.2' (19.9 m)
than the initial installed cost. Roll Width 39.375" (1.0 m)
Approx.
Roll Weight 80 lb (36.3 kg)

* See applicable guarantee for complete coverage and restrictions.

©2016 GAF 8/16 gaf.com • 1-800-ROOF-411

You might also like